2018 GRAND CHEROKEE USER GUIDE
Includes SRT®
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage,
knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the
app an important extension of your Jeep
®
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model
and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP”
(U.S. residents only).
www.jeep.com⁄en ⁄owners (U.S.) provides special oers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation ⁄ Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle
by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the
“Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow
the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
18WK-926-AA
GRAND CHEROKEE
Seventh Edition
User Guide
Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
Important
Get warranty and other information online – you can
review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of
the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous
and should never be done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular
telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Jeep
brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
source for common questions. However, it is not a
substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please
consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover
and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply
to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Jeep
brand dealer.
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA
US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents
precision workmanship, distinctive styling,
and high quality.
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibil-
ity and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use the features and applications when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result
in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
This guide illustrates and describes the op-
eration of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifi-
cations and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on prod-
ucts previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help
you quickly become acquainted with the im-
portant features of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your Jeep
®
vehicle
best, has factory-trained technicians and
genuine MOPAR
®
parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO FIND YOUR
OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a ref-
erence item to help you quickly become ac-
quainted with the most important features
and processes of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information and procedures.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedure possible with your ve-
hicle.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics
discussed in this User Guide, as well as
information covering features and processes
not covered in this User Guide, the full ve-
hicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for
free online in a printer-friendly PDF format.
To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro-
priate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By con-
verting from paper to electronic delivery for
the majority of the user information for your
vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de-
mand for tree-based products and lessen the
stress on our environment.
1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding
an occupant in the driver's seat. Special
cases not complying with this rule will be
properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that
some details of the image do not correspond
to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been con-
ceived considering vehicles with the steering
wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible
that in vehicles with the steering wheel on the
right side, the position or construction of
some controls is not exactly mirror-like with
respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end
of this User Guide.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-
cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the
relevant symbols in the tabs. There is always
a textual indication of the current chapter at
the side of each even page.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored la-
bels whose symbols indicate precautions to
be observed when using this component.
Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information on the symbols used in
your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out
of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may
roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu-
vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper-
ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli-
sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or
fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government
notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually.
Rollover Warning Label
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
2
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of WARNINGS to be followed to pre-
vent incorrect use of components which
could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be fol-
lowed to prevent against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
3
4
6
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Instrument Cluster
Display Controls
4 — Speed Controls 7 — Radio Controls 10 — Glove Compartment
2 — Paddle Shifters 5 — Ignition 8 — Climate Controls
3 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Uconnect Radio 9 — Switch Panel
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
8
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Window Switches 4 — Seats
2 — Power Mirror Switches 5 — Gear Selector
3 — Door Handles 6 — Cupholders
9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE —
IFEQUIPPED................13
KEYS .....................14
KeyFob.....................14
IGNITIONSWITCH............16
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .......16
Vehicle On Message .............17
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IFEQUIPPED................18
General Information .............18
SENTRYKEY................18
Customer Key Programming ........18
Replacement Keys ..............19
General Information .............19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IFEQUIPPED................19
To Arm The System .............19
To Disarm The System ............20
Rearming Of The System ..........20
DOORS ...................20
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . .20
Locking The Doors With One Or More
Doors Open...................23
Auto Relocking ................23
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ...................24
SEATS.....................24
Memory Seat..................24
Heated/Ventilated Seats ...........25
HEADRESTRAINTS...........27
Front Adjustment ...............27
Front Removal .................29
Rear Adjustment ...............29
STEERING WHEEL ...........30
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped
...................30
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
. .31
Heated Steering Wheel............31
MIRRORS ..................32
Folding Mirrors ................32
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .......33
EXTERIORLIGHTS............33
Headlight Switch ...............33
Headlights ...................34
Daytime Running Lights ...........34
High Beams ..................34
Automatic High Beams ...........34
Flash-To-Pass .................35
Parking Lights And Panel Lights .....35
Headlights On Automatically
With Wipers ..................35
Headlight Delay ................35
Lights-On Reminder .............36
Fog Lights ...................36
Turn Signals ..................36
Lane Change Assist .............36
Automatic Headlight Leveling —
HID Headlights Only .............36
Battery Saver..................37
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS..................37
Windshield Wiper Operation.........37
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . .38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
11
Rear Window Wiper/Washer .........39
CLIMATECONTROLS .........39
Automatic Climate Controls Overview . . .39
Climate Control Functions ..........46
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ..................46
Operating Tips ................47
WINDOWS.................48
Power Window Controls ...........48
Auto-Down Feature ..............48
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection ...................49
Reset Auto-Up .................49
Window Lockout Switch ...........49
Wind Buffeting ................49
POWER SUNROOF ...........50
Opening.....................50
Closing .....................50
Wind Buffeting ................50
Anti-Pinch Safety Device ..........51
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF
WITH POWER SHADE .........51
Opening Power Shade ............52
HOOD .....................52
Opening.....................52
Closing .....................52
LIFTGATE ..................53
Opening.....................53
Closing .....................54
Power Liftgate — If Equipped .......54
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER(HOMELINK).........56
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink ...................56
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels....56
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .....57
Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener ..................57
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device ............58
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button......................58
General Information .............59
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........59
Power Outlets .................59
Power Inverter ................62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12
VEHICLE USER GUIDE —
IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right
through your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touch-
screen system — If Equipped.
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle
User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No
Uconnect registration is required.
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to
access while the vehicle is in motion, the
system will display: Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
• Your User Guide
— Updated in
real-time
• Available when
and where you
need it
• Touchscreen
convenience
• Customizable
interface
• Maintenance
schedules and
information
•
Multilingual
• Comprehensive
icon & symbol
glossary
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide,
you will be able to explore your warranty
information and radio manual when and
where you need them. Your Uconnect system
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your
touchscreen radio to assist in better under-
standing your vehicle. There’s no app to
download, no phone to connect and no exter-
nal device needed for playback. Plus, it’s
updated throughout the year, in real-time, so
it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touch-
screen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-
ites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
• Operating
Instructions
• Maintenance
Schedules
• Warranty
Information
• Emergency
Procedures
• Fluid Level
Standards
• 911 Contact
and More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to
add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the
future.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Vehicle User Guide Touchscreen Icon
13
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.
The ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/
STOP push button ignition system. The Re-
mote Keyless Entry system consists of a key
fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if
equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to ap-
proximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld
key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
• With ignition on/start and the vehicle mov-
ing at 5 mph (8 km/h), all RKE commands
are disabled.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a
back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key
fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the
key fob once to unlock the driver's door or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors
and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on
the first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
Key Fob
1 — Unlock
2 — Liftgate
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle
will re-lock and if equipped, the security
alarm will arm. To change the current setting,
refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia"
in the Owner’s Manual for further informa-
tion.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key
fob to lock all doors and liftgate.
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock again automatically if the key is left
inside the passenger compartment, otherwise
the doors will stay locked.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed
by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is pro-
grammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-
grammed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
NOTE:
Black Keys (6.4L) must be replaced with
Black Keys and Red Keys (6.2L) must be
replaced with Red Keys.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
15
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as
long as the key fob is in the passenger com-
partment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a
low or dead battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the igni-
tion switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against
the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central lock-
ing, alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child
START/STOP Ignition Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
16
WARNING!
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "Starting
And Operating" for further information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver's door when the
ignition is in RUN (engine not running), a
chime will sound to remind you to place the
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
chime, the message will display “Ignition Or
Accessory On” in the cluster.
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sun-
roof (if equipped) will remain active up to ten
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will can-
cel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK, apply the
parking brake, place the engine in the
OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, al-
ways make sure the keyless ignition is in
“OFF” position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
WARNING!
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
17
REMOTE STARTING
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Push the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the re-
mote start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
• With remote start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes (time out) unless the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be manually started with
a push of the ignition START/STOP button
after two consecutive time outs.
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
is odorless and colorless. Carbon Mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause seri-
ous injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Op-
eration of the Remote Start System,
windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling
the engine. The system does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at
your authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
18
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is pro-
grammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-
grammed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remem-
ber to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
— IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the ve-
hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized op-
eration. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
• The horn will pulse.
• The turn signals will flash.
• The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the “OFF” mode.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless En-
try, make sure the vehicle’s keyless
ignition system is OFF.
19
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone. Refer to "Doors" in "Getting To
Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to
unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting
To Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the lift-
gate button on the key fob cannot arm or
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the
liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle
security alarm. If someone enters the ve-
hicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will
not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a
false alarm. If one of the previously described
arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm, regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action
is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security
alarm will turn the horn off after 29 seconds,
five seconds between cycles, up to eight
cycles if the trigger remains active and the
vehicle security alarm will rearm itself.
DOORS
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement
to the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This
feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without having
to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/
OFF; refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
20
• The key fob may not be able to be detected
by the vehicle passive entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and pre-
vent the passive entry system from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
• Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (Low Beams, License Plate
Lamp, Position Lamps) for whichever time
duration is set between 0, 30 (default),
60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock
also initiates two flashes of the turn signal
lamps.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response
time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will
arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-
grammed all doors will unlock when you grab
hold of the front driver’s door handle. To
select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab
the front passenger door handle to unlock all
four doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passen-
ger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Un-
lock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
passive entry. There are five situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive
entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
21
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
• When the vehicle security alarm is in pre-
arm or armed status and the liftgate transi-
tions from open to closed.
• When the liftgate transitions from opened
to closed and remote start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search
will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry
key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the
doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the
door lock knobs.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob out-
side the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a
Passive Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or
passenger front door handles, pushing the
passive entry lock button will lock the ve-
hicle.
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing
the door handle lock button. This could un-
lock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock
or unlock the doors, using either Passive
Entry door handle. This is done to allow you
to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle without the vehicle react-
ing and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect
System, the key protection described in
"Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive
Entry Key Fob in Vehicle" remains active/
functional.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
22
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s inte-
rior door panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is
built into the electronic liftgate release. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry
lock button located on the outside liftgate
door handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock
all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock
feature is built into the electronic liftgate
release.
Locking The Doors With One Or More
Doors Open
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
Auto Relocking
The auto door lock feature default condition
is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will
lock automatically when the vehicle's speed
exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door
lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer. The auto door lock
feature is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect
Settings.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate
Passive Entry Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
23
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small chil-
dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door
Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
SEATS
Memory Seat
This feature allows the driver to store up to
two different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory pro-
file contains desired position settings for the
driver seat, power side mirrors, power tilt and
telescopic steering column (if equipped),
and a set of desired radio station presets.
Your remote keyless entry key fob can also be
programmed to recall the same positions
when the unlock button is pushed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
one key fob can be linked to memory position
1 and the other key fob can be linked to
memory position 2.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Memory Seat Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
24
The memory seat switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists
of three buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed
memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/
RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to de-
sired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror,
power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release
either of the memory buttons (1) or (2).
The instrument cluster display will show
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the
vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in
PARK to recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob,
refer to “Linking And Unlinking The Re-
mote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” in
your Owner's Manual for further details.
Heated/Ventilated Seats
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the climate or controls screen
of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat
settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen
buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
once to
select HI-level heating.
• Press the heated seat button
a second
time to select LO-level heating.
• Press the heated seat button
a third
time to turn the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous op-
eration. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the heated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to your Owner's
Manual for further details.
25
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-
jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased
surface temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are
equipped with heated seats. The heated seat
switches for these seats are located on the
rear of the center console. There are two
heated seat switches
that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats indepen-
dently.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat
settings. The indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indica-
tor lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
• Push the heated seat button
once to
select HI-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a second
time to select LO-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a third
time to turn the heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous op-
eration. At that time, the number of illumi-
nated LEDs changes from two to one, indicat-
ing the change. The LO-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated
seats, the seat cushion and seat back will
have fans that draw the air from the passen-
ger compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at
two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through
the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once
to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a
second time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third
time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the venti-
lated seats to operate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
26
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the ventilated seats can be pro-
grammed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to your Owner's
Manual for further details.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the
risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints
should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
Front Adjustment
Active Head Restraints are passive, deploy-
able components, and vehicles with this
equipment cannot be readily identified by
any markings, only through visual inspection
of the head restraint. The Active Head Re-
straints (AHR) will be split in two halves, with
the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends for-
ward to minimize the gap between the back of
the occupant’s head and the AHR. This sys-
tem is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front pas-
senger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer
to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
in your Owner’s Manual for further informa-
tion.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push down-
ward on the head restraint.
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can
be tilted forward and rearward.
Adjustment Button
27
To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of
your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom
of the head restraint to move the head re-
straint away from your head.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service pur-
poses only. If either of the head restraints
require removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active
Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Re-
straint Systems” in “Safety” in your Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players.
These items may interfere with the op-
eration of the Active Head Restraint in
the event of a collision and could result
in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed
if they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-
dental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the
Active Head Restraint during sudden
stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
28
Front Removal
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service pur-
poses only. If either of the head restraints
require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active
Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Re-
straint Systems” in “Safety” in your Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players.
These items may interfere with the op-
eration of the Active Head Restraint in
the event of a collision and could result
in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed
if they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-
dental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the
Active Head Restraint during sudden
stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Rear Adjustment
The head restraints on the outboard seats are
not adjustable. They automatically fold for-
ward when the rear seat is folded to a load
floor position but do not return to their normal
position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position,
raise the head restraint until it locks in place.
The outboard head restraints are not remov-
able.
The center head restraint can be adjusted
when occupied, or removed for Child Seat
Tethering. To remove the head restraint, raise
it as far as it can go by pulling upward. Then,
push the release button at the base of the
post while pulling the head restraint upward.
Folded Rear Head Restraint
29
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push down-
ward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly pro-
tect the occupants. Follow the re-
installation instructions above prior to
WARNING!
operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint
in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always make sure the outboard head
restraints are in their upright positions
when the seat is to be occupied.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether,
refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
STEERING WHEEL
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
— If Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering col-
umn. The tilt/telescoping lever is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steer-
ing column, move the steering wheel upward
or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, push
the lever upward until fully engaged.
Center Head Restraint Release Button
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
Handle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
30
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering col-
umn. The power tilt/telescoping steering col-
umn lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up
or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the lever toward you or
push the lever away from you as desired.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
WARNING!
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel
The steering wheel contains a heating ele-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will
operate for an average of 80 minutes or more
before automatically shutting off. This time
may vary depending on the temperature of
the environment. The heated steering wheel
can shut off early or may not turn on when the
steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Control
31
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time to turn the heating element
off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the heated steering wheel can be pro-
grammed to come on during a remote start
through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-
jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must
exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods.
WARNING!
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or steering wheel covers of
any type and material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Folding Mirrors
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent posi-
tions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they
can be electrically folded rearward and un-
folded into the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches L
(left) and R (right). Push the switch once and
the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a
second time and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electri-
cally cycled, a potential extra button push is
required to get the mirrors back to the home
position. If the mirror does not electrically
fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
area which can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
32
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all
doors are closed, and the doors are locked).
• If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded,
they will unfold when the ignition is turned
ON.
• If the exterior mirrors were manually folded,
they will not automatically unfold.
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is
not turned on when delivered from the fac-
tory. The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors fea-
ture can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt
frost or ice. This feature can be
activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster. Refer
to “Climate Controls” in this chapter for fur-
ther information.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left
side of the instrument panel, next to the
steering wheel. The headlight switch controls
the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights
and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
1 — Auto
2 — Rotate Headlight Switch
3 — Push Fog Lights
4 — Rotate Dimmer
33
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the head-
light switch clockwise. When the headlight
switch is on, the parking lights, taillights,
license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the
headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (Off) position.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-
light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that
are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching
the lenses and reducing light output, avoid
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt,
wash with a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive ma-
terials to clean the lenses.
Daytime Running Lights
Non-SRT Vehicles
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity)
come on whenever the engine is running, and
the transmission is not in the PARK position.
The lights will remain on until the ignition is
switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
• If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp
on the same side of the vehicle will turn off
for the duration of the turn signal activa-
tion. Once the turn signal is no longer
active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
• The DRL function may be disabled through
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
SRT Vehicles
The Daytime Running Lights (bright inten-
sity) come on whenever the engine is run-
ning, and the transmission is not in the PARK
position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC posi-
tion or the parking brake is engaged.
The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
High Beams
Push the multifunction lever toward the in-
strument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction back
toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Automatic High Beams
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted
on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automati-
cally switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
34
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Con-
trol can be turned on or off by selecting
“ON” under “Auto High Beam” within your
Uconnect settings, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position. Re-
fer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in the Owner’s Manual for further informa-
tion.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights
and taillights of vehicles in the field of view
will cause headlights to remain on longer
(closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and
other obstructions on the windshield or
camera lens will cause the system to func-
tion improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Re-
duced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not
recommended), toggle highbeam lever
6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default
setting upon ignition off.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the
mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by partially pulling the multifunc-
tion lever toward the steering wheel. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on
until the lever is released.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)
position.
Headlights On Automatically With
Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this customer-
programmable feature. When your headlights
are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is pro-
grammable through the Uconnect system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain
Sensitive Wiper System” and it is activated,
the headlights will automatically turn on after
the wipers complete five wipe cycles within
approximately one minute, and they will turn
off approximately four minutes after the wip-
ers completely stop. Refer to “Windshield
Wipers And Washers” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will au-
tomatically dim to the lower nighttime inten-
sity.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped
with a headlight delay that will leave the
headlights on for approximately up to 90 sec-
onds. This delay is initiated when the ignition
35
is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled
off. Headlight delay can be cancelled by
either turning the headlight switch on then
off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo
lights are left on after the ignition is turned
OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s
door is opened.
Fog Lights
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or head-
light position and pushing in the headlight
rotary control.
The fog lights will operate only when the
parking lights are on or when the vehicle
headlights are on low beam. An indicator
light located in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The
fog lights will turn off when the switch is
pushed a second time, when the headlight
switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without mov-
ing beyond the detent, and the turn signal
(right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
Headlights Only
This feature prevents the headlights from
interfering with the vision of oncoming driv-
ers. Headlight leveling automatically adjusts
the height of the headlight beam in reaction
to changes in vehicle pitch.
Fog Light Operation
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
36
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery,
load shedding is provided for both the interior
and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar
for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is
rotated all the way up to the dome on position
for 10 minutes, the interior lights will auto-
matically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition
is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition
is cycled OFF, the exterior lights will auto-
matically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are lo-
cated on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers
are operated by rotating a switch, located on
the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window
Wiper/Washer” in this section.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first
four detent positions for intermittent set-
tings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation
and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the
windshield wiper switch is turned off, and
the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper set-
tings when weather conditions make a single
wiping cycle, with a variable delay between
cycles, desirable. At driving speeds above
10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regu-
lated from a maximum of approximately
18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a
cycle every one second (fourth detent).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Multifunction Lever
37
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the
lever (toward the steering wheel) and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers
will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released,
and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the
wipers are in the off position, the wipers will
operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will
resume normal operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles.
To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the wind-
WARNING!
shield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather condi-
tions make occasional usage of the wipers
necessary. Rotate the end of the lever down-
ward to the MIST position and release for a
single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash func-
tion must be used in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers for the driver. The feature is especially
useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to
one of four settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay po-
sition one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position four is the most sensitive.
NOTE:
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can
be used if the driver desires more sensitivity.
Place the wiper switch in the OFF position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
38
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection fea-
tures for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the automatic trans-
mission is in the NEUTRAL position, the
Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is
operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once
more will activate the washer pump which
will continue to operate as long as the switch
is held. Upon release of the switch, the wip-
ers will resume the continuous rear wiper
operation. When this rotary control is in the
OFF position, rotating it downward will acti-
vate the rear washer pump which will con-
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Once the switch is released it will return to
the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked
position.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will
resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the igni-
tion is turned OFF, the wiper will automati-
cally return to the “park” position.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Climate Controls Overview
The Climate Control System allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direc-
tion of air circulating throughout the vehicle.
The controls are located on the instrument
panel below the radio.
39
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
41
Automatic Climate Controls On The Faceplate
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
42
Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX
A/C
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on
the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this
function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation”
within this section for more information.
FRONT
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this
feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous
setting.
43
Icon Description
REAR
Rear Defrost Button
The Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
ten minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touch-
screen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touch-
screen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
44
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
45
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate
the air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu-
midified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press
the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning
and manually adjust the blower and airflow
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only
Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and in-
crease blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the ra-
diator), for an accumulation of dirt or in-
sects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cool-
ing performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode posi-
tion can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX
A/C operation to switch to the selected set-
ting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled auto-
matically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode
causes the LED in the control button to blink
and then turns off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate,
or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting
the driver and passenger temperature
control buttons. Once the desired tem-
perature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system
to function automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
46
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.
or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of
manual override features. The AUTO symbol
in the front ATC display will be turned off
when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro-
vide proper corrosion protection and to pro-
tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and de-
froster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and
the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recircula-
tion mode during Winter months is not rec-
ommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure ad-
equate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel
to the heating elements. Labels can be
peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instru-
ments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
47
CAUTION!
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
tions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the
air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust
and pollen from the air. Contact an autho-
rized dealer to service your cabin air filter,
and to have it replaced when needed.
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver's door
control all the door windows.
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window con-
trols will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a ve-
hicle, and do not let children play with
power windows. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
front and rear passenger doors window
switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for half a
second and release. The window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way
down during the Auto-Down operation, pull
up or push down on the switch briefly.
Power Window Switches
1 — Front Power Window Switches
2 — Rear Power Window Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
48
To open the window part way (manually),
push the window switch down briefly and
release.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle
and use the window switch again to close
the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions
may trigger the auto-reverse function unex-
pectedly during auto-closure. If this hap-
pens, pull the switch lightly and hold to
close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window
path before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two sec-
onds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to
open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional
two seconds after the window is fully
open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's
door trim panel allows you to disable the
window controls on the rear passenger doors.
To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (the indi-
cator light on the button with turn on). To
enable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button again (the indica-
tor light on the button will turn back off).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
ception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve-
hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in
certain open or partially open positions. This
is a normal occurrence and can be mini-
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear win-
dows together to minimize the buffeting. If
Power Window Lockout Button
49
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switch is located on the
overhead console.
Opening
Express Open
Push the switch rearward and release it
within one-half second. The sunroof will fully
open and stop automatically.
Manual Open
Push and hold the switch rearward to open
the sunroof. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement, and the sunroof will
remain in a partially open position until the
switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the button and the sunroof
will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent” and will occur
regardless of sunroof position. During Ex-
press Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing
Express Closing
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will fully close
automatically from any position.
Manual Closing
Push and hold the switch forward to close the
sunroof. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement, and the sunroof will remain in
a partially closed position until the switch is
pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as a
helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffet-
ing occurs with the rear windows open, adjust
the front and rear windows together.
If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any
window. This will minimize buffeting.
Power Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
50
Anti-Pinch Safety Device
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will auto-
matically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs. Next, push the switch forward
and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth
close attempt will be a Manual Close move-
ment with Pinch Protect disabled.
WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof.
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
WARNING!
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an
open sunroof. You could also be severely
injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate
the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,
other body parts, or any object to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF
WITH POWER SHADE
The CommandView sunroof with power shade
switch is located on the overhead console.
Commandview Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
4 — Opening Shade
5 — Closing Shade
51
Opening Power Shade
Express Open
Push the shade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second and the shade will
automatically open to the halfway position
and stop automatically.
Push the switch a second time from the
halfway position and the shade will automati-
cally open to the full open position and stop
automatically.
Manual Open
To open the shade, push and hold the switch
rearward. The shade will open and stop auto-
matically at the half-open position.
Push and hold the shade switch rearward
again and the shade will open automatically
to the full-open position.
NOTE:
Any release of the switch will stop the move-
ment and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed
and held rearward again.
HOOD
Opening
1. Pull the hood release lever located below
the steering wheel at the base of the
instrument panel.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the cen-
ter of the hood and move the safety latch
lever while lifting the hood at the same
time.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Closing
1. Before closing the hood, check to make
sure all filler caps are correctly installed.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push down to
close the hood and securely latch it into
place.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Release Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
52
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam
the hood to close it. Use a firm downward
push at the front center of the hood to
ensure that both latches engage.
LIFTGATE
Opening
The liftgate can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power liftgate button on the
overhead console, using the key fob outside
of the vehicle or the electronic liftgate re-
lease.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Key fob
• Outside handle
• Button on overhead console
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is
built into the electronic liftgate release. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Push the button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to release the liftgate.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-
grammed in the instrument cluster display,
all doors will unlock when you push the elec-
tronic release on the liftgate. If "Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed in
Uconnect, only the liftgate will unlock when
you push the electronic release on the lift-
gate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either front
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and
unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on
the doors and the driver's door lock cylinder
will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic
Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button
Location
53
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
Closing
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle
when the liftgate takes over the closing effort.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button lo-
cated to the left of the outside handle release
will lock the vehicle.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing
the button, located in the upper left trim in
the liftgate opening. Pushing button will only
close the liftgate. This button cannot be used
to open the liftgate.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be
opened by pushing the electronic
liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in your Own-
er’s Manual for further information), or by
pushing the liftgate button on the key fob.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open the power lift-
gate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the
button twice within five seconds a second
time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or
closed by pushing the liftgate button located
on the front overhead console. If the liftgate
is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the left
rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If
the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate
button located on the left rear trim panel will
reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash
to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing
(if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the
Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime
will be audible. Refer to "Uconnect Settings"
in "Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
2
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
54
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release
can be used to open the liftgate. The emer-
gency liftgate latch release can be ac-
cessed through a snap-in cover located on
the liftgate trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate
functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the lift-
gate travel path is clear. Make sure the
liftgate is closed and latched before driv-
ing away.
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate
if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed
is above 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in tem-
peratures below −22°F (−30°C) or tem-
peratures above 150° F (65° C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the
liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate
while it is closing or opening, the liftgate
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to
the side of the liftgate. Light pressure any-
where along these strips will cause the
liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice to
operate the liftgate.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is closing, the lift-
gate will reverse to the full open position.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is opening, the
liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop and the lift-
gate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your ve-
hicle. You and your passengers could be
injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the ve-
hicle.
• If you are required to drive with the
liftgate open, make sure that all win-
dows are closed, and the climate control
blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
55
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER (HOMELINK)
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink channels.
• To operate HomeLink, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink button.
• The HomeLink indicator light is located
above the center button.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it
is recommended that a new battery be placed
in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system. Make sure your hand-held transmit-
ter is programmed to activate the device you
are trying to program your HomeLink button
to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink before you use it
for the first time.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for in-
formation or assistance.
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink indicator light
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be per-
formed when programming HomeLink for the
first time. Do not erase channels when pro-
gramming additional buttons.
HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
56
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code,
a good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after
1995 have rolling codes. A device with a
rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button located where the antenna is
attached to the device. The button may not
be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may
vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the
button you normally use to operate the de-
vice.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will
also not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener
To program any of the HomeLink buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, fol-
low the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional but-
tons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and ob-
serve the HomeLink indicator light. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens, re-
lease both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling
code/non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate
rolling code final step 2, after completing
rolling code final step 1.
1.
At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
57
2. Return to the vehicle and push the pro-
grammed HomeLink button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink button and observe the
HomeLink indicator light. If the
HomeLink indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open
and close while you are programming
the universal transceiver. Do not pro-
gram the transceiver if people or pets are
in the path of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed
garage or confined area while program-
ming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from
your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide
(CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when in-
haled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device
Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Ga-
rage Door Opener” for the procedure on how
to program HomeLink to a miscellaneous
device, as it follows the same procedure. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code before beginning
the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after sev-
eral seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
The procedure may need to be preformed
multiple times to successfully pair the device
to your HomeLink buttons.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button
To reprogram a single HomeLink button that
has been previously trained, without erasing
all the channels, follow the procedure below.
Be sure to determine whether the new device
you want to program the HomeLink button to
has a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink but-
ton until the HomeLink Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
58
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all re-
maining steps.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and Eco-
nomic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Power Outlets
If equipped, there may be three 12 Volt
electrical power outlets on this vehicle.
The front power outlet may be located inside
the center storage bin of the instrument
panel. Push inward on the storage lid to open
the compartment and gain access to this
power outlet.
A second front power outlet may be located
inside the center console.
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Power Outlet
59
The rear power outlet may be located in the
right rear cargo area.
The power outlets are labeled with either a
“key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how
the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
with a “key” are powered when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position,
while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are
connected directly to the battery and pow-
ered at all times.
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-
ceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
• The rear cargo power outlet can be
switched to “battery” powered all the time
by switching the power outlet right rear
quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
60
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F90 – F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
2 — F104 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
61
Power Inverter
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter
outlet located on the back of the center
console. This outlet can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power de-
vices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
NOTE:
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
will automatically shut down. Once the elec-
trical device has been removed from the
outlet, the inverter should automatically re-
set. If the power rating exceeds approxi-
mately 170 Watts, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually. To reset the in-
verter manually, unplug the device and plug
it in again. To avoid overloading the circuit,
check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, DO NOT:
• insert any objects into the receptacles
• touch with wet hands
Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet
is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter
1 — USB Ports (Charging Only)
2 — Rear Seat Heater Switches
3 — Power Inverter Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY...................64
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls .................64
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped......65
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items ......................65
Display Menu items..............66
TRIP COMPUTER .............68
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES.................68
Red Warning Lights ..............69
Yellow Warning Lights ............72
Yellow Indicator Lights ............75
Green Indicator Lights ............76
White Indicator Lights ............77
Blue Indicator Lights .............78
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBDII ....................78
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .................79
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ....79
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
63
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful in-
formation to the driver. With the ignition in
the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on
the instrument panel, your instrument clus-
ter display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they are
not. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through the main menus
and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls
The instrument cluster display is located in
the center of the instrument cluster.
1. The top line where reconfigurable tell-
tales, compass direction, outside tem-
perature, Time, Range MPG or Trip are
displayed. This also displays the speed-
ometer when other menu pages are
displayed.
2. The main display area where the menus
and pop up messages are displayed.
3. The lower line where reconfigurable tell-
tales, menu name and menu page are
displayed.
• Push the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the main menus (Speedometer,
MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain, Driver As-
sist, Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stop/
Start, Audio, Navigation, Stored Messages,
Screen Setup and Speed Warning).
Instrument Cluster Display
1 — Speedometer Display
2 — Main Display
3 — Menu Name And Menu Page
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
64
• Push the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Speedometer, MPH/km/h, Vehicle
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy,
Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio, Naviga-
tion, Stored Messages, Screen Setup and
Speed Warning).
• Push the right arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the left arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine
oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instru-
ment cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The en-
gine oil change indicator system is duty cycle
based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position. To turn off the mes-
sage temporarily, push and release the OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator sys-
tem (after performing the scheduled mainte-
nance), refer to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place
the ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not
start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle
Info" in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the
gauge resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place
the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
• Speedometer • Trip
• MPH to km/h • Audio
• Vehicle Info • Stored Messages
• Driver Assist • Screen Setup
• Fuel Economy • Speed Warning
65
Display Menu items
SRT Instrument Cluster Display Performance
Features
The instrument cluster display can be used to
program the following Performance Features.
• To access, press and release either the up or
down arrow button until “SRT” appears in
the instrument cluster display, then press
and release the right arrow button to cycle
through the features. Press the OK button to
select a feature.
•0-60MPH
(0-100 km/h)
• Current G-Force
• 0-100 MPH
(0-161 km/h)
• Peak G-Force
• 1/8 Mile Timer • Lap Timer
• 1/4 Mile Timer • Lap History
• 60 ft Timer • Top Speed
• Braking Distance
Uconnect SRT Performance Features
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Features is intended for off-
highway or off-road use only and should
not be done on any public roadways. It is
recommended that these features be used
in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the
vehicle as measured by the performance
pages must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which can jeop-
ardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents.
• To access the SRT Performance Features,
press the “Apps” button on the touch-
screen then press the “Performance
Pages” button on the touchscreen.
• The Performance Page includes the follow-
ing menus:
•
Home
•
Gauges 2
•
Timers
•
G – Force
•
Gauges 1
•
Engine
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Warning Messages
Your vehicle will begin displaying warning
messages when the DEF level reaches a driv-
ing range of approximately 500 miles. If the
following warning message sequence is ig-
nored, your vehicle may not restart unless
DEF is added with in the mileage shown in
the instrument cluster display message.
• Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low
Refill Soon — This message will display
when DEF driving range is less than
500 miles, DEF fluid top off is required
with in the displayed mileage. The message
will be shown in the display during vehicle
start up with the current allowed mileage
SRT Performance Features Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
66
and accompanied by a single chime. The
remaining mileage can be pulled up any-
time by way of the “Messages” list within
the instrument cluster display.
• Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF
— This message will display when DEF
driving range is less than 311 miles. It is
also displayed at 249 miles, 186 miles,
and 124 miles. Continuous Display starts
at 124 miles. DEF fluid top off is required
with in the displayed mileage. The message
will be shown in the display during vehicle
start up with an updated distance mileage,
and it will be accompanied by a single
chime. Starting at 100 miles, remaining
range will be continuously displayed while
operating the vehicle. Chimes will also ac-
company the 75, 50 and 25 mile remaining
distances. The DEF Low telltale will be on
continuously until DEF fluid is topped off.
• Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF — This
message will display when the DEF driving
range is less than 1 mile, DEF fluid top off
is required or the engine will not restart.
The message will be shown in the instru-
ment cluster display during vehicle start
up, and it will be accompanied by a single
chime. The DEF Low telltale will be illumi-
nated continuously until DEF fluid tank is
filled with a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 li-
ters) of DEF.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning
Messages
There are different messages which are dis-
played if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than
DEF, has experienced component failures, or
when tampering has been detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced
the following warnings will display:
• Service DEF System See Dealer — This mes-
sage will display when the fault is initially
detected and each time the vehicle is
started. The message will be accompanied
by a single chime and the Malfunction
Indicator Light. We recommend you drive to
your nearest authorized dealer and have
your vehicle serviced immediately. If not
corrected in 30 miles, vehicle will enter the
“Engine Will not restart in XXXmi Service
DEF See dealer” warning stage and mes-
sage.
• Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This
message will display if the DEF system has
detected the incorrect fluid has been intro-
duced to the DEF tank. The message will be
accompanied by a single chime. We recom-
mend you drive to your nearest authorized
dealer and have your vehicle serviced im-
mediately. If not corrected in 30 miles,
vehicle will enter the Engine Will not restart
in XXX mi Service DEF See dealer warning
stage and message.
• Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF
See Dealer — This message is first dis-
played if the fault detected is not serviced
after 30 miles of operation. It is also dis-
played at 250 miles, 186 miles, and
124 miles. System service is required
within the displayed mileage. The message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display during vehicle start up with an up-
dated distance mileage, and it will be ac-
companied by a single chime. Starting at
124 miles, remaining range will be con-
tinuously displayed while operating the ve-
hicle. Chimes will also accompany the 75,
67
5,0 and 25 mile remaining distances. We
recommend you drive to your nearest au-
thorized dealer and have your vehicle ser-
viced immediately.
• Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System
See Dealer — This message will display if
DEF system issue detected is not serviced
during the allowed period. Your engine will
not restart unless your vehicle is serviced
by your authorized dealer. This message
will be displayed when under 1 mile until
engine will not start and each time the
vehicle is started, and will be continuously
displayed. The message will be accompa-
nied by a single chime. Your Malfunction
Indicator Light will be continuously illu-
mined. We highly recommend you drive to
your nearest authorized dealer if the mes-
sage appears while engine is running.
• Engine Will Not Start Service DEF System See
Dealer — This message will display when
the fault detected is not serviced after the
Engine will not restart Service DEF System
See Dealer message is displayed on the
next subsequent restart. Your engine will
not start unless you vehicle is serviced by
your authorized dealer. The message will be
accompanied by a single chime. Your Mal-
function Indicator Light will be continu-
ously illuminated. If the message appears
and you can not start the engine, we rec-
ommend you have your vehicle towed to
your nearest authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
• The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank.
If you have a fault related to the DEF
system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See your authorized dealer for
service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of
the DEF fluid is below 12F (-11C). The DEF
line heater will possibly warm up the DEF
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display (Toggle left or
right to select Trip A or Trip B). Push and
release the OK button to display the Trip
information.
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedi-
cated message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read care-
fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa-
tion in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first
if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment op-
tions and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
68
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is
cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is
low, or that there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking
brake has been disengaged, and the fluid
level is at the full mark on the master cylinder
reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy-
draulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condi-
tion has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in
either half of the dual brake system is indi-
cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will
turn on when the brake fluid level in the
master cylinder has dropped below a speci-
fied level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have
service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair
is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light
on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop
the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is re-
quired.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position.
The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illumi-
nate, have the light inspected by an autho-
rized dealer.
69
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Start-
ing And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a problem with the Electronic Throttle Con-
trol (ETC) system. If a problem is detected
while the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition
when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the ve-
hicle is running, immediate service is re-
quired and you may experience reduced per-
formance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing.
The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If
the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant tem-
perature is too high, this indicator will illumi-
nate and a single chime will sound. If the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
70
temperature reaches the upper limit, a con-
tinuous chime will sound for four minutes or
until the engine is able to cool: whichever
comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to nor-
mal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when
this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuck-
led, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or
remain on continuously and a chime will
sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly
faster, with the transmission in PARK or
NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the
light turns off, you may continue to drive
normally.
71
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause
a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Service Adaptive Cruise Control
Warning Light
This light will turn on when the ACC system is
not operating and needs service. For further
information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warn-
ing Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system in-
spected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the
Traction Mode is set to Sport, Track or Full
OFF in Drive Modes.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
72
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning
light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the
“ESC Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-
ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is
in an ESC event.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and re-
quires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
— LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane
marker. The warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low
Fuel Warning.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
— Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position before
engine start. If the bulb does not come on
when turning the ignition switch from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illumi-
nate the light after engine start. The vehicle
should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may
flash to alert serious conditions that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe
catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
73
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher tem-
peratures than in normal operating condi-
tions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam-
age to the vehicle control system. It also
could affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
SER
V
4WD
— Service 4WD Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend
you drive to the nearest service center and
have the vehicle serviced immediately.
— Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the Forward Collision Warning Sys-
tem. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message
is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con-
sumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compro-
mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp
braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedi-
cated tire repair kit and contact your au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
74
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This se-
quence will continue upon subsequent ve-
hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve-
hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-
tion telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
CAUTION!
of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af-
ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Air Suspension Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspen-
sion system is actively adjusting the ride
height.
— Forward Collision Warning Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
75
— 4WD Low Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides
a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-
creased torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on four-wheel drive op-
eration and proper use.
Green Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With No Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and there is no target
vehicle detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped" in "Starting
And Operating" for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
— LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings have
been detected and the system is “armed”
and ready to provide visual and torque warn-
ings if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
park lights or headlights are turned on.
— Snow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Snow Mode is
active.
Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op-
erating” for further information.
— Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
76
— Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op-
erating” for further information.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Tow Mode is
active.
Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op-
erating” for further information.
— Track Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Track Mode is
active.
Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op-
erating” for further information.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the ve-
hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb
if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Custom Mode
SRT is active.
Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op-
erating” for further information.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case is in the
“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed
is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
— LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light illumi-
nates solid white. This occurs when only left,
right, or neither lane line has been detected.
77
If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— SRT Speed Warning Indicator Light
— If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the
speed warning telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster with a number matching
the set speed. When the set speed is ex-
ceeded, the indication will light up yellow
and flash along with a continuous chime.
Speed Warning can be turned on and off in
the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
the Owner’s Manual for further information.
The number “55” is only an example of a
speed that can be set.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Light
This light will turn on when the speed control
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
— Selec Speed Control Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the
vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and
push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
— Valet Mode SRT Indicator
Light
This light will turn on when Valet Mode is
active.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear
of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If
the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current govern-
ment regulations.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
78
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diag-
nostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter dam-
age and power loss will soon occur. Im-
mediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of ve-
hicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING!
• Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle
systems, including personal infor-
mation.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecu-
rity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal require-
ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass
could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspec-
tion and Maintenance (I/M), this
check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that
the OBD II system is ready for testing.
79
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your
vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a
dead battery or a battery replacement. If the
OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated
test, which you can use prior to going to the
test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion, but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will
have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of
two things will happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD
II system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the igni-
tion in the off position or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II sys-
tem is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If
your vehicle was recently serviced or had a
battery failure or replacement, you may need
to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as
you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above
test routine may then indicate that the sys-
tem is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illumi-
nated during normal vehicle operation you
should have your vehicle serviced before go-
ing to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
80
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........82
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......82
Electronic Brake Control System .....83
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .93
Blind Spot Monitoring ............93
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .....95
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). . .97
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS .................102
Occupant Restraint Systems Features . .102
Important Safety Precautions ......102
Seat Belt Systems .............103
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS) .....................112
Child Restraints ...............122
Transporting Pets ..............135
SAFETY TIPS ..............135
Transporting Passengers ..........135
Exhaust Gas .................135
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle .............136
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle .........137
SAFETY
81
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-
mance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en-
sure that the ABS is working properly each
time the vehicle is started and driven. During
this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of
ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to
run for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated elec-
tronic equipment that may be suscep-
tible to interference caused by improp-
erly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such
equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may
lead to a collision. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the
WARNING!
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM
tires. Modification may result in degraded
ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
will turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re-
mains on or comes on while driving, it indi-
cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is
SAFETY
82
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,
the brake system should be serviced as soon
as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This
system includes Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec-
tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stabil-
ity and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Brak-
ing (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dy-
namic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent
Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control
(SSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear
axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the
rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS be-
fore the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the brake system is not functioning properly
and that immediate service is required. If the
“Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emer-
gency braking situation by sensing the rate
and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the anti-lock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re-
sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stop-
ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
83
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll
back from a complete stop while on an in-
cline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before
this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in
order for HSA to activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle up-
hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate
if the transmission is in PARK or NEU-
TRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
WARNING!
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake op-
eration to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument
cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
SAFETY
84
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more
than one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate con-
trol four times within 20 seconds. The
“ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center
and then an additional slightly more than
one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and
then back to ON. If the sequence was
completed properly, the “ESC Off Indica-
tor Light” will blink several times to con-
firm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return
this feature to its previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate
roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with
your trailer, the trailer brakes may be
activated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid roll-
ing down an incline while resuming ac-
celeration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pres-
sure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the
transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can re-
sult in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel
spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel
spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake
pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or re-
duce engine power to provide enhanced ac-
celeration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions
similar to a limited slip differential and con-
trols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain en-
abled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced
mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
85
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning
more than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will
start to flash as soon as the ESC system
becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be-
gins to flash during acceleration, ease up on
the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from ex-
cessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities
of an ESC equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop-
erly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your ve-
hicle, and may negatively affect the per-
formance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, brak-
ing system, tire type and size or wheel
WARNING!
size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
performance. Any vehicle modification
or poor vehicle maintenance that re-
duces the effectiveness of the ESC sys-
tem can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per-
sonal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of opera-
tion, the ESC system may have multiple op-
erating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the
ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
SAFETY
86
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for
more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes
a momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushed
may be required to return to ESC On.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the lim-
ited slip feature described in the TCS
WARNING!
section), has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi-
nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta-
bility offered by the ESC system is re-
duced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on
any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and
ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC
Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle
is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the in-
strument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle
speed slows below the predetermined speed
the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
“Full Off” can only be achieved in Track
Mode if so equipped.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes if so equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features
are disabled. Therefore, enhanced ve-
hicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not en-
gage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the en-
hanced vehicle stability offered by ESC
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not en-
87
WARNING!
gage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended for
off-highway or off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the
ignition is turned to the ON mode.
It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster)
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac-
tion and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration,
ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the igni-
tion is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-
ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indi-
cates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.
When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehi-
cle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
SAFETY
88
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leav-
ing the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full
Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a
complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading,
road conditions and driving conditions,
influence the chance that wheel lift or
rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all
wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities
of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take
the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the
sway. TSC will become active automatically
once an excessively swaying trailer is recog-
nized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full
Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the
vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe
location, and adjust the trailer load to
eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emer-
gency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodi-
cally apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the wind-
shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When
Rain Brake Support is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver inter-
action is required.
89
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the
ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) mod-
ules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which
the ESC module is detecting vehicle instabil-
ity. The torque that the steering wheel re-
ceives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notifica-
tion the driver receives that the feature is
active is the torque applied to the steering
wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the
driver realize the correct course of action
through small torques on the steering wheel,
which means the effectiveness of the DST
feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied
torque. It is very important to realize that this
feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning
the driver is still responsible for steering the
vehicle.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driv-
ing while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills during
various driving situations. HDC controls ve-
hicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or
driver is actively overriding with brake or
throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate auto-
matically if driven down a grade of sufficient
magnitude. The set speed for HDC is select-
able by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following sum-
marizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
SAFETY
90
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection, but will not af-
fect the gear chosen by the transmission.
When actively controlling HDC the transmis-
sion will shift appropriately for the driver-
selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi-
cient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on
an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any
of the following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and
the HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is
in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu-
minate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal
operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
the driver pushes the HDC switch but en-
able conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
HDC disables due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descend-
ing hills. The driver must remain attentive
to the driving conditions and is responsible
for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD
Low Range only. SSC maintains vehicle
speed by actively controlling engine torque
and brakes.
91
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or
driver is actively overriding with brake or
throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• Driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automati-
cally once the following conditions are met:
• Driver releases throttle.
• Driver releases brake.
• Transmission is in any selection other
than P.
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may
be reduced when climbing a grade and the
level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summa-
rizes the SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not
active
NOTE:
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not
affect the gear chosen by the transmission.
While actively controlling SSC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and correspond-
ing driving conditions.
• SSC performance is influenced by the Ter-
rain Select mode. This difference may be
notable to the driver and may be perceived
as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
SAFETY
92
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and
the SSC switch has an LED which offer feed-
back to the driver about the state SSC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu-
minate and remain on solid when SSC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal
operating condition for SSC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
the driver pushes the SSC switch but en-
able conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
SSC disables due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due
to overheated brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in
off road conditions. The driver must re-
main attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe
vehicle speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
uses two radar-based sensors, located inside
the rear bumper fascia, to detect Highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, mo-
torcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approxi-
mately one lane width on both sides of the
vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts
at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle.
93
The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both out-
side rear view mirrors to let the driver know
that the system is operational. The BSM
system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters
stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM warning light, located in the out-
side mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle
moves into a blind spot zone.
The BSM system can also be configured to
sound an audible (chime) alert and mute the
radio to notify you of objects that have en-
tered the detection zones.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is in-
tended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where the vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP
system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is de-
tected, will alert the driver. When RCP is on
and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is
alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Safety”
in the Owner's Manual for more information.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a de-
Rear Detection Zones
Blind Spot Warning Light
SAFETY
94
tected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is pres-
ent. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal
is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an
audible chime will also be sounded. When-
ever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time,
both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the
radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current oper-
ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
provides the driver with audible and visual
warnings within the instrument cluster dis-
play to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are
intended to provide the driver with enough
time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential
collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the for-
ward looking sensors as well as the Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the prob-
ability of a forward collision. When the sys-
tem determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings.
95
Changing FCW System Status
The Forward Collision Warning settings are
located in the Uconnect display in the con-
trols settings.
NOTE:
• The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Me-
dium” setting and the system status is
“Warning & Braking”. This allows the sys-
tem to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings and it applies autonomous
braking.
• Changing the FCW status to “Only Warn-
ing” prevents the system from providing
limited active braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking ad-
equately in the event of a potential frontal
collision, but maintains the audible and
visual warnings.
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event
of a potential frontal collision. If FCW is set
to “Off”, “FCW OFF” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
Changing FCW Sensitivity
The FCW feature has three settings and can
be changed within the Uconnect System
Screen:
• Far
• Medium
• Near
Far
The far setting provides warnings for poten-
tial collisions more distant in front of the
vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most
reaction time to avoid a collision.
More cautious drivers that do not mind fre-
quent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Medium
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Me-
dium” setting and the system status is
“Warning & Braking”. This allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
Near
Changing the FCW sensitivity to the “Near”
setting, allows the system to warn you of a
potential frontal collision when you are much
closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than
the “Far” setting, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want
to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further
details.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own,
nor can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility
to avoid a collision by controlling the ve-
hicle via braking and steering. Failure to
follow this warning could lead to serious
injury or death.
SAFETY
96
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with run flat tires —
when the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of
14 psi (96 kPa) or lower, always check tire
pressure and replace the tire at the first
opportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below
14 psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat
mode of operation. In this condition, it is
recommended a vehicle maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of
50 miles (80 km). The manufacturer does not
recommend using the run flat feature while
driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or
towing a trailer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside tempera-
ture decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure.
This is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three-hour period. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for information
on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low pressure warning threshold for any rea-
son, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition
exists, and will not turn off until the tire
pressure is at or above recommended cold
tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pres-
sure must be increased to the recommended
cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to be turned off.
97
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warn-
ing Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three
hours) tire pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-
mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately
28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning
Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warnings have
been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. The TPM sensor is not de-
signed for use on aftermarket wheels
and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM
wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take
CAUTION!
your vehicle to an authorized dealership
to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure, always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-
mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro-
vide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
SAFETY
98
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon-
sibility to maintain correct tire pressure
using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor
the actual tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important, for you to regu-
larly check the tire pressure in all of your tires
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pres-
sures
• TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will il-
luminate in the instrument clus-
ter, and an audible chime will be
activated, when one or more of
the four active road tire pres-
sures are low. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message
and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) in a different color. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
99
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure
units in PSI, BAR or kPa.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of
the four active road tire(s), you should stop as
soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s)
that is in a different color on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold
tire pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX”
message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warn-
ing Light off.
The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will
return to its original color and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the up-
dated tire pressure(s) have been received.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
Service TPM System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and
remain on solid when a system fault is de-
tected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. The instrument cluster display will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
for a minimum of five seconds. This message
is then followed by a graphic display, with “-
-“ in place of the pressure value(s), indicat-
ing which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will not be present, and a
pressure value will be displayed instead of
dashes. A system fault can occur by any of
the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-
ing next to facilities emitting the same
Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
SAFETY
100
NOTE:
There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to
monitor the tire pressure. If you install the
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will remain on, a chime will sound, and
the instrument cluster display will still dis-
play a pressure value in the different color
graphic display and an “Inflate to XX” mes-
sage will be displayed. After driving the ve-
hicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster display will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message
for five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value. For each
subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster display will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value. Once you repair or
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it
on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster display will
display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel
and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS
Sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Moni-
toring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will dis-
play the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the
instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will no longer be displayed as long
as no system fault exists.
101
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information
in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and
your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of
a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in
the front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and use the proper
child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”
in this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear
the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to
“Child Restraints” in this section for fur-
ther information) should be secured in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in
child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
SAFETY
102
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical
to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a dis-
abled person, refer to the “Customer As-
sistance” section for customer service
contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a
collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save
lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst
injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in
a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the igni-
tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passen-
ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out-
board front passenger seat is unoccupied.
103
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the
seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed
until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt
while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat
or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It
is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat
belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up. You can
strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of
SAFETY
104
WARNING!
the vehicle. Always be sure you and
others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. Oc-
cupants, including the driver, should al-
ways wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seat-
ing position to minimize the risk of se-
vere injury or death in the event of a
crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
WARNING!
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve-
hicle, take it to an authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
WARNING!
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop,
you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your
seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli-
sion, increasing head and neck injury. A
seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will
not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your
105
WARNING!
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a col-
lision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your ab-
domen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as pos-
sible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
SAFETY
106
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing must
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat
belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt
away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in
a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-
age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor-
age until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt in a crash.
Adjustable Anchorage
107
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should
be used only if the existing seat belt is not
long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is
not required for a different occupant, it must
be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly
fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT
USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front
edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle
and the center of the occupant’s body is
LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use
the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt
WARNING!
is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Re-
move and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury
in the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the
arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and posi-
tioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
SAFETY
108
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. The seat belt system has a retrac-
tor assembly that is designed to release web-
bing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used
to secure a child restraint system. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un-
der the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the lock-
ing feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far
enough to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the
ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in
a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
109
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disen-
gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti-
vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly
when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
WARNING!
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing
the seat belt or children who are using
booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a har-
ness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equip-
ment cannot be readily identified by any
markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being
soft foam and trim, the back half being deco-
rative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) de-
termines whether the severity or type of rear
impact will require the Active Head Re-
straints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and
front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends for-
ward to minimize the gap between the back
of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce
the extent of injuries to the driver and front
passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or
may not deploy in the event of a front or side
impact. However, if during a front impact, a
secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may
deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
SAFETY
110
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players.
These items may interfere with the op-
eration of the Active Head Restraint in
the event of a collision and could result
in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed
if they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-
dental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint, ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the
Active Head Restraint during sudden
stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting
and positioning the head restraint, refer to
“Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered
during a collision, the front half of the head
restraint will be extended forward and sepa-
rated from the rear half of the head restraint
(See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
111
the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint
must be reset into the original position to
best protect the occupant for all types of
collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer
must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat before driving. Personally
attempting to reset the AHRs may result in
damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best pro-
tect you in all types of collisions. Have
deployed AHRs reset by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect
you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir-
cuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system
even if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
SAFETY
112
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected
that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on during the four to eight seconds when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en-
gine related gauges are not working, the Oc-
cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also
be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an autho-
rized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Re-
dundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section
of this manual.
113
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/
shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supple-
ment to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul-
tistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to
the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or
other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immedi-
ately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in
less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle
switch that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cush-
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air
Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Knee Air Bag
SAFETY
114
WARNING!
ions are designed to open only when the
air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type
and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle de-
celeration over time, vehicle speed and dam-
age by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have de-
ployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air
bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the
knee impact bolsters such as alarm
lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instru-
ment panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact
by working together with the seat belts, pre-
tensioners, and front air bags.
115
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the
seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts,
in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim
cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the
seat seam into the space between the occu-
pant and the door. The SAB moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-
tains (SABICs) are located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is
labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag Label
SAFETY
116
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addi-
tion to the injury reduction potential provided
by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the
side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way
and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they
are not belted and seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-
pants through side windows in certain side
impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack lug-
gage or other cargo up high enough to
block the deployment of the SABICs.
The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deploy-
ment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as in-
tended, do not install any accessory
items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sun-
roof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation
WARNING!
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the de-
ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the ap-
propriate response to impact events. The sys-
tem is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant
protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact de-
ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-
side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at cer-
tain angles, or some side collisions that do
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
117
not impact the area of the passenger com-
partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions
where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags
can be seriously injured or killed. Occu-
pants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or
child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your pro-
tection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an in-
flating Side Air Bag. To get the best
protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly
and sit upright with their backs against
WARNING!
the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster
seat that is appropriate for the size of the
child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to
be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a colli-
sion. The Side Air Bags work with your
seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain rollover events. The ORC determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indi-
cator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in
progress and whether deployment is appro-
priate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deploy-
ment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the
rollover sensing system will also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-
pants through side windows in certain roll-
over or side impact events.
SAFETY
118
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and intercon-
necting wiring associated with electrical Air
Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the
air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc-
cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blis-
tering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gen-
erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irri-
tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you
have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area
with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt preten-
sioners cannot protect you in another col-
lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten-
sioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
119
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communica-
tion network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of
the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery
has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for 15
minutes from the intervention of the En-
hanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to
the Enhanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circu-
lation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric Motor (if equipped)
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position
and remove the key from the ignition switch
to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine com-
partment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine. If there
are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from igni-
tion START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air
bag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim
cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the
front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
SAFETY
120
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to
tell anyone who works on your vehicle
that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function prop-
erly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, in-
cluding your trim cover and cushion,
needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to an authorized dealer. Only manufac-
turer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are re-
corded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
121
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
up at all times, including babies and chil-
dren. Every state in the United States, and
every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for
ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail-
able. According to crash statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle.
The force required to hold even an infant
on your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper re-
straint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of re-
straints for children from newborn size to the
child almost large enough for an adult safety
belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow
all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the la-
bels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should
also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-
caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to
Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
SAFETY
122
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or weight
limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or
who have outgrown the height or weight limit
of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-
facing child restraint, but are too small to
properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have outgrown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing child re-
straint. Two types of child restraints can be
used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert-
ible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in
the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or
height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible
child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil-
dren who have outgrown their infant carrier
but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by
their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
123
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing
weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should re-
main in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If
the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back
is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could
come loose in a collision. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can
loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before ad-
justing the vehicle seat position. When
the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re-
install the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt
or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from
the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks
and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use
this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably
over the front of the vehicle seat – while
the child is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt
fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
SAFETY
124
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
125
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child re-
straint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seat-
ing position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating
positions may have a top tether anchorage
but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child re-
straint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating
Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
126
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system
to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual
for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraint may be removed
in the center seating position only.
127
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the
seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat. To access them, pull the
carpeted floor panel away from the seat back,
this will expose the top tether strap anchor-
ages.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the
strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the
center position using the LATCH system.
This position is not approved for install-
ing child seats using the LATCH attach-
ments. You must use the seat belt and
tether anchor to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint” for typical
installation instructions.
LATCH Anchorages
Tether Strap Anchorages
SAFETY
128
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the
center seat position with the vehicle seat
belts, the rear center seat position has an
armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the
upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,
first lower the arm rest. The tether is
located behind the armrest and hooked
onto the plastic seat backing.
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from
the plastic seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether
hook to the strap located on the front of
the arm rest.
Always follow the directions of the child re-
straint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-
tions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
129
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of
the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat
belts that are not being used by other occu-
pants or being used to secure child restraints.
An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un-
der no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or
for attaching other items or equipment
to the vehicle.
SAFETY
130
Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to prop-
erly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an in-
fant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de-
signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked
mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR
will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” de-
scription in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Re-
straint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
131
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraint may be removed in
the center seating position only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to prop-
erly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
WARNING!
• Follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most posi-
tion to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
SAFETY
132
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to re-
tract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to
pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Top Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-
facing car seat to any location in front of
the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An-
chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
133
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to
find the tether anchorage. You may need
to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to an-
other position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted
floor panel away from the seat back, this
will expose the top tether strap
anchorages.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the an-
chor and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head re-
straints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap un-
der the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and head-
rest then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
6. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-
ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible
until the gap panel is folded down. Do
not use the visible cargo tie down hooks,
located on the floor behind the seats, to
attach a child restraint tether anchor.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(Located On Seatback)
Top Tether Strap Mounting
SAFETY
134
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split
rear seat, make sure the tether strap
does not slip into the opening between
the seatbacks as you remove slack in the
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could
harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a colli-
sion.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con-
tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col-
orless and odorless. Breathing it can make
you unconscious and can eventually poi-
son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
• If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure
that all windows are closed and the cli-
mate control BLOWER switch is set at
high speed. DO NOT use the recircula-
tion mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force out-
side air into the vehicle. Set the blower
at high speed.
135
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar-
eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Dam-
aged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding
seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this
light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag System has been
detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have your autho-
rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost
mode and place the blower control on high
speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See an au-
thorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor
mat that is securely attached using the floor
mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position
and interfere with the accelerator, brake or
clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
SAFETY
136
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to in-
terfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor
mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat
that cannot be properly attached and
secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress
the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for
interference. If your floor mat interferes
with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area
when the vehicle is moving. Objects can
become trapped under accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and could cause
a loss of vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob-
jects could change the position of the
floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
WARNING!
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor
mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle
carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re-
install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat
has been properly installed and is se-
cured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,
nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the
tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
137
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare)
for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and lock-
ing.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or
if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
when using “Track-Use” parts and equip-
ment:
• NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment
on public roads. FCA US LLC does not
authorize the use of “Track-Use” equip-
ment on public roads.
• The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is
for race vehicles on race tracks. To help
ensure the safety of the race driver,
engineers should supervise the installa-
tion of “Track-Use” parts.
• FCA US LLC does not authorize the
installation or use of any part noted as
“Track-Use” on any new vehicle prior to
its first retail sale.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equip-
ment before driving on public roads.
• ALWAYS properly use your three-point
seat belts when driving on public roads.
• In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up. You can
strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of
the vehicle.
SAFETY
138
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE —
GAS......................141
Automatic Transmission ..........141
Normal Starting ...............141
STARTING THE ENGINE —
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE .........143
Automatic Transmission ..........143
Normal Starting ...............144
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS ........144
3.6L & 5.7L Engines ............144
Diesel Engine ................145
SRT Engines .................145
STOP/START SYSTEM —
IFEQUIPPED...............146
Automatic Mode ...............146
Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop ................147
To Start The Engine While In
Autostop Mode ...............147
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ....................148
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ....................148
System Malfunction ............148
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . .148
Ignition Park Interlock ...........150
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System ....................150
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode ........150
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . .151
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . .153
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION ...............153
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped ........153
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped ........154
Shift Positions ................154
Shifting Procedures .............155
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped .157
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED . .158
Description .................158
Air Suspension Modes ...........160
Instrument Cluster Display Messages . .161
Operation ..................161
SELEC-TERRAIN —
IF EQUIPPED ...............162
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection .......162
Instrument Cluster Display Messages . .163
SELEC-TRACK —
IF EQUIPPED (SRT) ..........163
Custom ....................164
Active Damping System ..........164
Launch Control— If Equipped ......164
Guidelines For Track Use .........166
SPEED CONTROL............167
Activation ...................168
Setting A Desired Speed .........168
Varying The Speed .............168
Resume Speed ...............169
Accelerating For Passing .........169
Deactivation .................169
STARTING AND OPERATING
139
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC)....................170
Activation ..................170
Setting A Desired Speed ..........170
Varying The Speed .............171
To Resume ..................172
Deactivation .................172
Setting The Following Distance ......173
ACC Operation At Stop ...........173
Changing Modes ..............173
General Information.............175
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST ...................175
ParkSense Sensors .............175
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . .175
Instrument Cluster Display ........175
ParkSense System Usage Precautions. .176
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR
PARKASSIST...............177
ParkSense Sensors .............177
Activation/Deactivation ...........177
Engagement/Disengagement .......178
Operation With A Trailer ..........178
General Warnings ..............178
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......178
LANESENSE ...............179
LaneSense Operation ............179
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .......180
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA..................180
Symbols And Messages On The
Display ....................180
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
GASOLINEENGINE...........181
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . .183
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
DIESEL ENGINE .............183
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel .....185
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel . . . .185
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ............186
TRAILER TOWING ...........189
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) — Non SRT .......189
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) — Diesel .........190
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) — SRT ..........191
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(Summit Models) — If Equipped.....192
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(SRT Models) — If Equipped .......193
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . .195
Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle ...............195
Recreational Towing-Two Wheel Drive
Models ....................196
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Four-Wheel Drive Models .........196
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/
Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models ....................196
STARTING AND OPERATING
140
STARTING THE ENGINE —
GAS
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK and apply
the parking brake.
• Always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in the OFF mode, key fob is
removed from the vehicle and vehicle is
locked.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
WARNING!
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the en-
gine. Apply the brakes before shifting into
any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not ob-
served:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when
the engine is above idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop
and the engine is at idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
141
3. The system takes over and attempts to
start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automati-
cally after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push
the button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or press-
ing the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then
push and release the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with
vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the trans-
mission will automatically select PARK
and the engine will turn off, however the
ignition will remain in the ACC mode
(NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a ve-
hicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and
the vehicle speed is below 5 mph
(8 km/h), pushing the START/STOP but-
ton once will turn the engine off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton must be held for two seconds (or three
short pushes in a row) to turn the engine
off. The ignition will remain in the ACC
mode (NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is
turned off when the transmission is not in
PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and
the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left
in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode
and the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the
ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF
mode,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to place the ignition to the ACC
mode (instrument cluster will display
“ACC”),
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the
RUN mode (instrument cluster will dis-
play “ON/RUN”),
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode (instrument cluster will display
“OFF”).
STARTING AND OPERATING
142
STARTING THE ENGINE —
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to
30-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
between such intervals will protect the starter
from overheating.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK and apply
the parking brake.
• Always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in the OFF mode, key fob is
removed from the vehicle and vehicle is
locked.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or
WARNING!
fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
Engine start up in very low ambient tempera-
ture could result in evident white smoke. This
condition will disappear as the engine warms
up.
CAUTION!
• The engine is allowed to crank as long as
30 seconds. If the engine fails to start
during this period, please wait at least
two minutes for the starter to cool before
repeating start procedure.
• If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light”
remains on, DO NOT START engine be-
fore you drain the water from the fuel
filters to avoid engine damage. Refer to
“Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” in your
Diesel Supplement for further informa-
tion, which can be found with your on-
line Owner’s Information.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the transmission gear
selector in the PARK position. Apply the
brake before shifting to any driving range.
143
Normal Starting
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights
when starting the engine.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or press-
ing the accelerator pedal
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
NOTE:
A delay of the start of up to five seconds is
possible under very cold conditions. The
"Wait to Start" telltale will be illuminated
during the pre-heat process, When the
engine Wait To Start light goes off the
engine will automatically crank.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” re-
mains on, DO NOT START engine before
you drain the water from the fuel filters to
avoid engine damage. Refer to “Draining
Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” in your Diesel Supple-
ment for further information, which can be
found with your online Owner’s Informa-
tion.
3. The system will automatically engage the
starter to crank the engine. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push
the button again.
5. Check that the oil pressure warning light
has turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
3.6L & 5.7L Engines
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles
(100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or
90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contrib-
utes to a good break-in. However, wide-open
throttle acceleration in low gear can be det-
rimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory is high-
quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and
lubricant changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades,
refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in "Techni-
cal Specifications”.
STARTING AND OPERATING
144
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during
its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a nor-
mal part of the break-in and not interpreted
as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator
often during the break in period. Add oil as
required.
Diesel Engine
The diesel engine does not require a break-in
period due to its construction. Normal opera-
tion is allowed, providing the following rec-
ommendations are followed:
• Warm up the engine before placing it under
load.
• Do not operate the engine at idle for pro-
longed periods.
• Use the appropriate transmission gear to
prevent engine lugging.
• Observe vehicle oil pressure and tempera-
ture indicators.
• Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
• Vary throttle position at highway speeds
when carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer tow-
ing or no load operation will extend the time
before the engine is at full efficiency. Re-
duced fuel economy and power may be seen
at this time.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving
type lubricant. Oil changes should be consis-
tent with anticipated climate conditions un-
der which vehicle operations will occur. The
recommended viscosity and quality grades
are shown under “Fluids And Lubricants” in
"Technical Specifications” in this manual.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
SRT Engines
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining
optimum performance and maximum dura-
bility for your new SRT Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class
manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other.
This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe
the following driving behaviors during the
new vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle
for an extended period of time.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and
not more than halfway to avoid rapid accel-
eration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than
3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph
(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
145
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and
not more than halfway to avoid rapid accel-
eration in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than
5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph
(112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting
manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher
rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with
the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph
(136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport
driving schools, or similar activities during
the first 1500 mi (2414 km).
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add
if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may
be higher through the first oil change inter-
val. Running the engine with an oil level
below the add mark can cause severe engine
damage.
STOP/START SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to re-
duce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle
stop if the required conditions are met. Re-
leasing the brake pedal or pressing the accel-
erator pedal will automatically re-start the
engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other up-
graded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer en-
gine start. At that time, the sys-
tem will go into STOP/START
READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP AC-
TIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START
READY state. A STOP/START READY mes-
sage will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display within the Stop/Start sec-
tion. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual for further informa-
tion.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and
the brake pedal depressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
146
The engine will shut down, the tachometer
will move to the zero position and the Stop/
Start telltale will illuminate indicating you
are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will
check many safety and comfort conditions to
see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information
about the operation of the Stop/Start system
may be viewed in the instrument cluster dis-
play Stop/Start Screen. In the following situ-
ations, the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not
been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved
from previous AUTOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/START sys-
tem going into a STOP/START READY state
under more extreme conditions of the items
listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the
throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission
will automatically re-engage upon engine re-
start.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
147
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (lo-
cated on the switch bank). The light on
the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will ap-
pear in instrument cluster display within
the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off
the STOP/START system), the engine will
not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself
back to an ON condition every time the
ignition is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the switch
will turn off.
For complete details on the Stop/Start Sys-
tem refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play“ in “Getting to Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an au-
thorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a sub-
stitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when exit-
ing the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or dam-
age.
STOP/START Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
148
WARNING!
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear
selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmis-
sion is in PARK before exiting the ve-
hicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK
if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shift-
ing to PARK, and verify that the trans-
mission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking.
Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the ve-
hicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
WARNING!
idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is run-
ning. Before exiting a vehicle, always
come to a complete stop, then apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode,
the transmission is locked in PARK, se-
curing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
WARNING!
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not ob-
served:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
149
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to
be in PARK before the ignition can be turned
to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This sys-
tem also locks the transmission in PARK
whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK
when the ignition is in the ACC mode (even
though the engine will be off). Ensure that
the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the
vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans-
mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must
be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve
the vehicle's overall fuel economy during nor-
mal driving conditions. Push the “ECO”
switch in the center stack of the instrument
panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A
light on the switch indicates when ECO mode
is disabled (for regular models) or enabled
(for SRT models).
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is en-
gaged, the vehicle control systems will
change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
• The overall driving performance will be
more conservative.
• Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension
will operate in "Aero" mode over a broader
speed range. Refer to the section on
Quadra-Lift for further information.
ECO Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
150
• In SRT models, the transmission will
launch (from a stop) in second gear, and the
torque converter clutch may engage at
lower engine speeds and remain on longer.
• Some ECO mode functions may be tempo-
rarily inhibited based on temperature and
other factors.
Active Noise Cancellation — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation System. This system uses four
microphones embedded in the headliner to
detect undesirable exhaust noise, which
sometimes occurs when operating in ECO
mode. An onboard frequency generator cre-
ates counteracting sound waves through the
audio system to help keep the vehicle quiet.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel efficient
8 speed transmission. The gear selector is
located in the center console.
The transmission gear selector provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and
MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-)
or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion), or tapping the shift paddles (+/-), if
equipped, will manually select the transmis-
sion gear, and will display the current gear in
the instrument cluster. Refer to "AutoStick"
in this section for further information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position
(when pushed forward), it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In AutoStick mode, the transmis-
sion gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-
nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
Transmission Gear Selector
1 — Lock Button
2 — Transmission Gear Selector
151
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slip-
pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
selector into the MANUAL (M) position (be-
side the DRIVE position), or tap one of the
shift paddles on the steering wheel (if
equipped). Tapping the (-) shift paddle (if
equipped) to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick
mode will retain the current gear. The current
transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you
can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL),
or the shift paddles (if equipped), to manu-
ally shift the transmission. Tapping the gear
selector forward (-) while in the MANUAL (M)
position, or tapping the (-) shift paddle (if
equipped), will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear. Tapping the selector
rearward (+) (or tapping the (+) shift paddle,
if equipped) will command an upshift.
NOTE:
The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-
enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect Per-
sonal Settings or, in SRT models, using Drive
Modes.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will
shift up or down when (+/-) is manually se-
lected by the driver (using the gear selector,
or the shift paddles, if equipped), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, ex-
cept as described below.
• The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically down-
shift to first gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear (or third gear, in 4LO range,
Snow mode, or Sand mode). Tapping (+) (at
a stop) will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second or third gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not
occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift
at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if
equipped), or holding the gear selector in
the (-) position, will downshift the trans-
mission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more notice-
able when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
Shift Paddles
STARTING AND OPERATING
152
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear se-
lector to the DRIVE position, or press and
hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and
the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until
"D" is once again indicated in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick at
any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the ve-
hicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
feature. This mode is a configuration set up
for typical enthusiast driving. The engine,
transmission, and steering systems are all set
to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
provide improved throttle response and modi-
fied shifting for an enhanced driving experi-
ence, as well the greatest amount of steering
feel. This mode may be activated and deac-
tivated by pushing the Sport button on the
instrument panel switch bank.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range
only) transfer case, which provides conve-
nient full-time four-wheel drive. No driver
interaction is required. The Brake Traction
Control (BTC) System, which combines stan-
dard ABS and Traction Control, provides re-
sistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow
additional torque transfer to wheels with trac-
tion.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate
for conditions where 4WD LOW range is rec-
ommended. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips”
in “Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s
Manual.
Sport Mode Button
153
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully au-
tomatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO
mode. The Quadra-Trac II transfer case pro-
vides three mode positions:
• 4WD HI
• NEUTRAL
• 4WD LOW
This transfer case is fully automatic in the
4WD HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the
4WD LOW position can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together and force
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. The 4WD LOW position is in-
tended for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry,
hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire
wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW,
the engine speed is approximately three
times that of the 4WD HI position at a given
road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause dam-
age to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear
drive shafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-
mission is in PARK. The parking brake
WARNING!
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each 4WD system mode position, see
the information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice,
snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement.
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” fur-
ther on in this section for further information
on the various positions and their intended
usages.
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
154
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear
drive shafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-
mission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which
allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels while providing
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for
further information on the various positions
and their intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion or the engine running, shift the transmis-
sion into “N”, and push the “4WD LOW”
button once on the transfer case switch. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument
cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid
when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection
condition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below
3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in “N” Press
4 Low” message will flash from the instru-
ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion or the engine running, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD
LOW” button once on the transfer case
switch. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will flash and go out when
the shift is complete.
Transfer Case Switch
155
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or
a transfer case motor temperature protec-
tion condition exists, a “For 4x4 High Slow
Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in N push
4 Low” message will flash from the instru-
ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped; how-
ever, difficulty may occur due to the mating
clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift comple-
tion to occur. The preferred method is with
the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h).
If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
WARNING!
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disen-
gages both the front and rear drive shafts
from the powertrain and will allow the
vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is
in PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with
the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se-
lector switch) for four seconds. The light
behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will
blink, indicating shift in progress. The
light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is com-
plete. A “NEUTRAL” message will appear
in the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for fur-
ther information.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEU-
TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU-
TRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
156
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case
in NEUTRAL, push and hold the EN-
GINE START/STOP button until the en-
gine turns off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button
twice (without pressing the brake pedal),
to turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
14. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely attached to a tow
vehicle.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
“To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift
Procedure in Owner’s Manual” message will
flash from the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se-
lector switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N)
button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive II System features
two torque transfer couplings. The couplings
include an Electronic Limited-Slip Differen-
tial (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II
transfer case. The optional ELSD axle is fully
automatic and requires no driver input to
operate. Under normal driving conditions,
the unit functions as a standard axle, balanc-
ing torque evenly between left and right
wheels. With a traction difference between
left and right wheels, the coupling will sense
a speed difference. As one wheel begins to
spin faster than the other, torque will auto-
matically transfer from the wheel that has
less traction, to the wheel that has traction.
While the transfer case and axle coupling
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
157
differ in design, their operation is similar.
Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case shift-
ing information, preceding this section, for
shifting this system.
QUADRA-LIFT —
IF EQUIPPED
Description
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system pro-
vides full time load leveling capability along
with the benefit of vehicle height adjustment
by the push of a button. The vehicle will
automatically raise and lower the ride height
to adapt to the appropriate driving condi-
tions. At higher speeds, the vehicle will lower
to an aerodynamic ride height and when
operating in off-road modes, the vehicle will
raise the ride height accordingly. The buttons
near the terrain switch in the center console
area can be used to set preferred ride height
to match the appropriate conditions.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the stan-
dard position of the suspension and is
meant for normal driving.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 1.1 inches (28 mm)) – This is the
primary position for all off-road driving until
OR2 is needed. A smoother and more com-
fortable ride will result. Push the “UP”
button once from the NRH position while
the vehicle speed is below 38 mph
(61 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the
vehicle speed remains between 40 mph
(64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the
vehicle will be automatically lowered to
NRH.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 2.2 inches (55 mm)) – This position is
intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, push the “UP” button twice
from the NRH position or once from the
OR1 position while vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the vehicle height will be automatically
lowered to OR1.
Selec-Terrain Switch
1 — UP Button
2 — DOWN Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator
Lamp (Customer Selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
STARTING AND OPERATING
158
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inches (15 mm)) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the ve-
hicle. The vehicle will automatically enter
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph
(90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph
(90 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH
from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed re-
mains between 20 mph (32 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 20 sec-
onds or if the vehicle speed falls below
20 mph (32 km/h). The vehicle will enter
Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if
the vehicle is in “SPORT” mode.
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 1.6 inches (40 mm) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger en-
try and exit as well as lowering the rear of
the vehicle for easier loading and unloading
of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
“DOWN” button once from (NRH) while the
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between
15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h)
for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the
Entry/Exit Mode change will be cancelled.
To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up”
button once while in Entry/Exit Mode or
drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/
Exit Mode can be enabled through the
Uconnect Touch-Screen Radio. If this feature
is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the
gear selector is in "PARK", the terrain switch
is in "AUTO", the transfer-case is in "AUTO”
and the vehicle level should be either in
Normal or Aero Mode. The Vehicle will not
automatically lower if the air suspension level
is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle is
equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM),
the lowering will be suppressed when the
ignition is switched OFF and the door is open
to prevent setting the alarm off.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the proper height based
on the position of the Selec-Terrain switch.
The height can be changed from the default
Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air
suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain”
in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
The system requires that the engine be run-
ning for all changes. When lowering the ve-
hicle all of the doors, including the liftgate,
must be closed. If a door is opened at any
time while the vehicle is lowering the change
will not be completed until the open door(s)
is/are closed.
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a
lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
headlights from incorrectly shining into on-
coming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the
rear of the vehicle will move up first and then
the front. When lowering the vehicle, the
front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be
noticed that the air suspension system oper-
ates briefly, this is normal. The system is
correcting the position of the vehicle to en-
sure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the
Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a fea-
ture which allows the automatic leveling to be
159
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
For further information refer to “Driving Tips”
in “Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-
ther information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high
pressure volume of air to operate the sys-
tem. To avoid personal injury or damage to
the system, see your authorized dealer for
service.
Air Suspension Modes
The Air Suspension system has multiple
modes to protect the system in unique situa-
tions:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which al-
lows the automatic leveling to be disabled.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle,
the air suspension system has a feature
which automatically lowers the vehicle to
entry/exit ride height. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspen-
sion system has a feature which will put the
vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the
automatic load leveling system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-
ther information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting
allows you to only display suspension warn-
ings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this
mode must be enabled. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
160
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-
ther information.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument clus-
ter. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Operation
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illumi-
nate to show the current position of the ve-
hicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a
position which the system is working to
achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator
lamps are flashing on the “UP” button, the
highest flashing indicator lamp is the posi-
tion the system is working to achieve. When
lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing
on the "DOWN" button the lowest solid indi-
cator lamp is the position the system is work-
ing to achieve.
Pushing the “UP” button once will move the
suspension one position higher from the cur-
rent position, assuming all conditions are
met (i.e. engine running, speed below thresh-
old, etc). The “UP” button can be pushed
multiple times, each push will raise the re-
quested level by one position up to a maxi-
mum position of OR2 or the highest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e. ve-
hicle speed, etc).
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move
the suspension one position lower from the
current level, assuming all conditions are met
(i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed be-
low threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can
be pressed multiple times. Each push will
lower the requested level by one position
down to a minimum of Park Mode or the
lowest position allowed based on current con-
ditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based
on vehicle speed and the current vehicle
height. The indicator lamps and instrument
cluster display messages will operate the
same for automatic changes and user re-
quested changes.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5,
and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle
is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and
5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator
lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle
is in this position.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/
Exit Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested
while vehicle speed is between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator
lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator
lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the
vehicle to reduce speed. If vehicle speed is
reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and
indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit
161
Mode is achieved at which point indicator
lamp 3 will go solid. If during the height
change to Entry/Exit Mode, the vehicle
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the
height change will be paused until the
vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the height change continues
to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return
to NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected
while the vehicle is not moving provided
that the engine is still running and all doors
remain closed.
• Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Transport Mode.
• Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 3 and
6 will be illuminated. Customer driving will
disable Tire/Jack Mode.
• Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps
3 and 4 will be illuminated. Customer driv-
ing will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
SELEC-TERRAIN —
IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of
the vehicle control systems, along with driver
input, to provide the best performance for all
terrains.
Selec-Terrain consists of the following posi-
tions:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow.
When in Snow mode (depending on certain
operating conditions), the transmission
may use second gear (rather than first gear)
during launches, to minimize wheel slip-
page. If equipped with air suspension, the
default ride height for Snow is Normal Ride
Height (NRH).
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with seamless steering
feel to provide improved handling and ac-
celeration over two-wheel drive vehicles. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
• Sand – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving sur-
faces. The electronic brake controls are set
to limit traction control management of
throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with
air suspension, the default ride height for
Sand is Normal Ride Height (NRH).
Selec-Terrain Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
162
• Mud – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is
maximized for traction. Some binding may
be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The elec-
tronic brake controls are set to limit traction
control management of throttle and wheel
spin. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to Off Road 1.
• Rock – Off road calibration only available in
4WD Low range. The vehicle is raised (if
equipped with Air Suspension) for im-
proved ground clearance. Traction based
tuning with improved steer-ability for use
on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for
low speed obstacles such as large rocks,
deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air suspen-
sion, the vehicle level will change to Off-
Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain switch is in
ROCK mode, and the transfer case is
switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High, the
Selec-Terrain system will return to AUTO.
NOTE:
Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec
Speed Control for steep downhill control. See
“Electronic Brake Control System” in this
section for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument clus-
ter. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
SELEC-TRACK —
IF EQUIPPED (SRT)
Description
Selec-Track combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver
input, to provide the best performance for all
terrains.
Rotate the Selec-Track knob to select the
desired mode.
Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multime-
dia” section in your Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
Selec-Track consists of the following posi-
tions:
• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration.
Performance based tuning that provides a
rear wheel drive feel but with improved
handling and acceleration over a two-wheel
drive vehicle. This feature will reset to
AUTO on an ignition cycle.
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. This
feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition
cycle.
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with seamless steering
feel to provide improved handling and ac-
celeration over two-wheel drive vehicles.
Selec-Track Switch
163
• Track – Track road calibration for use on
high traction surfaces. Driveline is maxi-
mized for traction. Some binding may be
felt on less forgiving surfaces. This feature
will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle.
• Tow – Use this mode for towing and hauling
heavy loads. Vehicle suspension will go to
sport mode. Trailer sway control is enabled
in the ESC system. This feature will reset to
AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
Custom
This mode allows the driver to create a cus-
tom vehicle configuration that is saved for
quick selection of favorite settings. The sys-
tem will return to AUTO mode when the
ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to
RUN, if this mode is selected. While in Cus-
tom Mode the Stability, Transmission, Steer-
ing, Suspension, all-wheel drive set up, and
Paddle shifter settings may be configured
through the custom mode set-up.
NOTE:
Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multime-
dia” section in your Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
Active Damping System
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic
controlled damping system. This system re-
duces body roll and pitch in many driving
situations including cornering, acceleration
and braking. There are 3 modes:
• Street Mode (Available in terrain positions
AUTO, SNOW and CUSTOM.) — Used dur-
ing highway speeds where a touring sus-
pension feel is desired.
• Sport Mode (Available in terrain positions
AUTO, SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) — Pro-
vides a firm suspension for better handling.
• Track Mode (Available in terrain positions
AUTO, TRACK and CUSTOM.) — Provides
a full firm suspension for an aggressive
track experience.
Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multime-
dia” section in your Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
Launch Control— If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Con-
trol system that is designed to allow the driver
to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a
straight line. Launch Control is a form of
traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is in-
tended for use during race events on a closed
course where consistent quarter mile and
zero to sixty times are desired. The system is
not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track.
Use of this feature in low traction (cold, wet,
gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess
wheel slip outside this systems control result-
ing in an aborted launch.
Preconditions:
• Launch Control should not be used on pub-
lic roads. Always check track conditions
and the surrounding area.
• Launch Control is not available within the
first 500 miles (805 km) of engine break-
in.
• Launch Control should only be used when
the engine and transmission are at operat-
ing temperature.
• Launch Control is intended to be used on
dry, paved road surfaces only.
STARTING AND OPERATING
164
CAUTION!
Use on slippery or loose surfaces may
cause damage to vehicle components and
is not recommended.
Launch Control is only available when the
following procedure is followed:
NOTE:
Pushing the SRT button on the Select-Track
switch or pressing the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen are the two options to access
launch control features. Please refer to “SRT
Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in your Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
1. Press the “Race Options” button on the
touchscreen or push the LAUNCH button
on the Select-Track switch.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button
on the touchscreen. This screen will allow
you to adjust your launch RPM’s for opti-
mum launch/traction.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Control” but-
ton on the touchscreen, follow instruc-
tions in the instrument cluster display.
• Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
• Put vehicle in first gear.
• Steering wheel must be pointing
straight.
• Vehicle must be on level ground.
• Apply brake pressure.
• While holding the brake, rapidly apply
and hold the accelerator pedal to wide
open throttle. The engine speed will
hold at the RPM that was set in the
“Launch RPM Set-up” screen.
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument
cluster display to inform the driver if one
or more of the above conditions have not
been met.
4. When the above conditions have been
met, the instrument cluster display will
read “Release Brake”.
5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle
reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
will return to its current ESC mode.
Launch control will abort before launch
completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the
cluster under any the following conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during
launch.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is
no longer moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change
the system to another mode.
NOTE:
After launch control has been aborted, ESC
will return to its current ESC mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive
wheels are spinning and do not have trac-
tion. Damage to the transmission may oc-
cur.
165
Guidelines For Track Use
NOTE:
Because of the extreme conditions encoun-
tered during track use, any damage or wear
associated with track use may not be covered
by warranty.
• If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive
Modes they will alter the vehicle’s perfor-
mance in various driving situations. It is
recommended that your vehicle operates in
SPORT or TRACK modes during the track
event.
• Prior to each track event/day, verify all
fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to
“Fluid Capacities” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
• Prior to each track event, verify the front
and rear brake pads have more than ½ pad
thickness remaining. If the brake pads re-
quire changing, please burnish prior to
track outing at full pace.
NOTE:
Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for
extended track usage due to increased ther-
mal capacity.
• At the conclusion of each track event, it is
recommended that a brake bleed proce-
dure is performed to maintain the pedal
feel and stopping capability of your Brembo
High Performance brake system.
• It is recommended that each track outing
should end with a minimum of one cool
down lap using minimal braking.
• If equipped with a removable lower front
fascia grille, it is recommended to remove it
for track use during warm/hot weather to
improve cooling airflow to critical pow-
ertrain and cooling system components.
• All SRT vehicles are track tested for
24 hours of endurance, however, it is rec-
ommended that suspension system, brake
system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft boots
should be checked for wear or damage after
every track event.
• Track usage results in increased operating
temperatures of the engine, transmission,
driveline and brake system. This may affect
noise vibrations and harshness (NVH)
countermeasures designed into your ve-
hicle. New components may need to be
installed to return the system to the original
NVH performance.
• Tire pressure:
– 40 psi (276 kpa) hot, recommend
32 psi (221 kpa) front, 30 psi
(207 kpa) rear cold
NOTE:
It is recommended that you target 40 psi
(276 kpa) Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusion
of each track session. Starting at 32 psi
(221 kpa) Front & 30 psi (207 kpa) Rear
Cold and adjusting based on ambient & track
conditions is recommended. Tire pressure
can be monitored via the instrument cluster
display and can assist with adjustments.
Track burnishing your brakes:
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use,
the brake pads and rotors must have a ther-
mal burnish for factory installed components
or when new brake friction components are
installed:
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes
by driving at 75% speed. Brake at ap-
proximately 0.60-0.80g maximum with-
out ABS intervention.
STARTING AND OPERATING
166
2. Lap the track in this manner until you
start smelling the brakes. Continue for
another ½ lap at speed, then do a two lap
cool down with minimal brake applies.
Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If
they are, do another cool down lap.
3. Do not continue for more than one full
burnishing lap after you start smelling the
brakes. Do not get them smoking heavily.
This will get them too hot and affect their
life negatively in future track use.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the pad-
dock for at least 30 min. If an infrared
thermal gun is available, allow rotors to
cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going back
out.
5. There should be a thin, ash layer when
inspecting the pads installed in the cali-
per. Having the ash layer go more than
half the thickness of the pad material
indicates too aggressive of a burnish.
6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is
required. If the pads start smelling in the
next track session, reduce speed and
braking decel to burnish targets and fol-
low step 2-4.
7. New pads installed on old rotors still need
to be burnished. New rotors installed with
old pads should be burnished at the track
or street driven for 300 city miles to
develop an adequate lining transfer layer
on the rotor surface prior to track use.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use
should be replaced. Resurfacing of the
rotors is not recommended, as it removes
mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor
cheek, making it less robust and increas-
ing the likelihood of pulsation in further
track use.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Switches
1 — Push CANC/Cancel
2 — Push SET (+)/Accel
3 — Push RES/Resume
4 — Push On/Off
5 — Push SET (-)/Decel
167
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple Speed Control func-
tions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be
reactivated by pushing the Speed Control
on/off button and resetting the desired ve-
hicle set speed.
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will ap-
pear on the instrument cluster display to
indicate the speed control is on. To turn the
system off, push the on/off button a second
time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on
the instrument cluster display to indicate the
speed control is off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could acci-
dentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET
(+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed. Once a speed has been set a
message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set
speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster display when the speed is
set.
Varying The Speed
Once the Speed Control has been activated,
the speed can be increased or decreased.
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
more information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
STARTING AND OPERATING
168
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on
the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Accelerating For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANC button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the igni-
tion switch OFF erases the set speed from
memory.
169
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC)
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive
Cruise Control, the controls operate exactly
the same as the speed control with only a
couple of differences. With this option you
can set a specified distance you would like to
maintain between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
automatically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
Activation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button.
“ACC READY” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the ACC is on.
Setting A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display
will show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the
system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the
current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close prox-
imity.
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
On/Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
STARTING AND OPERATING
170
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
If you do not, the vehicle may continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. If this oc-
curs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be de-
termined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
Varying The Speed
Once the ACC has been activated, the speed
can be increased or decreased.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set
speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does
not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach
the set speed, the brake system will auto-
matically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to
a full stop when following a target vehicle.
If an ACC host vehicle follows a target
vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will
release the vehicle brakes two seconds af-
ter coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving up hill and down hill. However, a
slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. In addition, downshifting may oc-
cur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and nec-
essary to maintain set speed. When driving
up hill and down hill, the ACC system will
cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
more information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be de-
creased by pushing the SET (-) button.
171
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
more information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the
RES (resume) button and then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The instru-
ment cluster display will show the last set
speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer
than two seconds, then the system will
cancel and the brake force will be ramped-
out. The driver will have to apply the brakes
to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a sta-
tionary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used
if traffic and road conditions permit. Re-
WARNING!
suming a set speed that is too high or too
low for prevailing traffic and road condi-
tions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe opera-
tion. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Deactivation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the
system off.
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster display to
indicate the ACC is off.
WARNING!
Leaving the ACC system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than
you want. You could lose control and have
an accident. Always leave the system OFF
when you are not using it.
STARTING AND OPERATING
172
Setting The Following Distance
The specified following distance for ACC can
be set by varying the distance setting be-
tween four bars (longest), three bars (long),
two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using
this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears
in the instrument cluster display.
• To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Increase button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting increases by one bar (lon-
ger).
• To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Decrease button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, if
the target vehicle starts moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a stand-
still, your vehicle will resume motion without
the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to
a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will
cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument clus-
ter display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle
at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is un-
buckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes
will release. A cancel message will display on
the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be
required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the
driver must ensure that there are no pedes-
trians, vehicles or objects in the path of
the vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
WARNING!
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Changing Modes
If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode
can be turned off and the system can be
operated as a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode. When in the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode the distance
setting feature will be disabled and the sys-
tem will maintain the speed you set.
• To change between the different cruise con-
trol modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) on/off button which turns the
ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control off.
• Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control mode.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further
information.
173
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions, ve-
hicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Fail-
ure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance con-
ditions.
WARNING!
• Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that
the brakes must be applied manually. An
audible chime will sound when the
brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway con-
struction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
WARNING!
• When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode for cruising at a constant preset
speed. For additional information, refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in your Owner’s Manual.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will
not react to preceding vehicles. Always be
aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the
Cruise Control buttons. The two control
modes function differently. Always con-
firm which mode is selected.
STARTING AND OPERATING
174
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap-
proximately five seconds. When the gear selec-
tor is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster display will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense switch LED will be off when
the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires
service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Instrument Cluster Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located
within the instrument cluster display. It pro-
vides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-
tected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
175
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-
brations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instru-
ment cluster display will read
“PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is
turned off, the instrument cluster display
will show a “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the vol-
ume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, tak-
ing care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to
do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to appear in the in-
strument cluster display.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the
liftgate is in the open position and the
vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay atten-
tion to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds
the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
176
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is de-
tected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND
REAR PARK ASSIST
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front
of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field
of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
When an object is detected within 79 inches
(200 cm) behind the rear bumper while the
vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning will appear
in the instrument cluster display. In addition
a chime will sound (when Sound and Display
is selected from the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect System
screen). As the vehicle moves closer to the
object, the chime rate will change from single
1/2 second tone (for rear only), to slow (for
rear only), to fast, to continuous.
Activation/Deactivation
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If
your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic
Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be au-
tomatically applied and released when per-
forming a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If
ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear
selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A
display warning will appear in the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
177
Engagement/Disengagement
To disengage the system, push the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the system passes from engaged to
disengaged and vice versa, it is always ac-
companied by a dedicated message in the
instrument cluster display.
System engaged: ParkSense switch LED off.
System disengaged: ParkSense switch LED on
constantly.
The ParkSense switch LED lights up also in
the case of a ParkSense system failure. If the
button is pushed with a system failure, the
ParkSense switch LED flashes for about five
seconds, then it stays on constantly.
After the ParkSense has been disengaged, it
will stay in this condition until the following
engagement, even if the ignition device
passes from ON/RUN to OFF and then again
to ON/RUN.
Operation With A Trailer
The operation of the sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is
inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The
sensors are automatically reactivated when
the trailer's cable plug is removed.
General Warnings
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in the in-
strument cluster display, clean the
ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel
and perpendicular parking maneuvers by
identifying a proper parking space, providing
audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is defined as “semi-
automatic” since the driver maintains control
of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes.
Depending on the driver's parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle
into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or pas-
senger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for control-
ling the vehicle, responsible for any sur-
rounding objects, and must intervene as
required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after be-
ing instructed to remove their hands from
the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
STARTING AND OPERATING
178
• The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as
heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a
parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must
have at least 30 miles (48 km) accumu-
lated before the ParkSense Active Park As-
sist system is fully calibrated and performs
accurately. This is due to the system’s dy-
namic vehicle calibration to improve the
performance of the feature. The system will
also continuously perform the dynamic ve-
hicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new
tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can
be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park As-
sist switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park As-
sist switch again (LED turns off).
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist sys-
tem is enabled the “Active ParkSense
Searching - Push OK to Switch to Perpen-
dicular” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display. You may switch to per-
pendicular parking if you desire. Push the OK
button on the left side steering wheel switch
to change your parking space setting. You
may switch back to parallel parking if you
desire.
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver.
NOTE:
If the turn signal is not activated, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system will au-
tomatically search for a parking space on the
passenger's side of the vehicle.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further
information.
LANESENSE
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at
speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below
112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system
uses a forward looking camera to detect lane
markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
Location
179
When both lane markings are detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts out of the
lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to unin-
tentionally drift out of the lane, the Lane-
Sense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across
the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides visual warnings
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected,
a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-
vided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met,
the LaneSense system will monitor if the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and
provides an audible warning to the driver
when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the
wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off. The
LED in LaneSense button will be illuminated
while the system is deactivated.
The LaneSense button is located
on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system
on, push the LaneSense button (LED turns
off). A “LaneSense On” message is shown in
the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA
Symbols And Messages On The Display
You can see an on-screen image of the rear of
your vehicle whenever the transmission is
shifted into REVERSE. The ParkView Rear
Back-Up Camera image will be displayed on
the Uconnect Display, located on the center
stack of the instrument panel.
If the Uconnect Display appears foggy, clean
the camera lens located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or
DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be acti-
vated with the “Rear View Camera” button in
the Controls menu. This feature allows the
customer to monitor the area directly behind
STARTING AND OPERATING
180
the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to
ten seconds while at speed. If the vehicle
speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Rear View Camera image will be displayed
continuously until deactivated via the “X”
button on the touchscreen.
Refer to “ParkView Rear Back-Up Camera” in
“Starting And Operating” in your Owner's
Manual for further details.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up;
even when using the ParkView Rear
Back-Up Camera. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
GASOLINE ENGINE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located under the headlamp switch).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice
buildup and re-release the fuel door using the
inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper
doors inside the pipe seals the system.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Door Latch
181
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe, the nozzle opens and holds the flap-
per doors while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
6. Wait five seconds before removing the
fuel nozzle to allow fuel to drain from
nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper doors
to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the fuel door is
open or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is run-
ning. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light”
to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always
place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do
not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler
STARTING AND OPERATING
182
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door,
use the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage
bin to the center, this will pop up the
outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other
hand to disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel
door, push the release cable back to the
home position to re-seat the fuel door
latch to the closed position.
NOTE:
If the fuel door does not latch after the
manual release cable has been activated, the
actuator latch should be manually returned to
the closed position.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
DIESEL ENGINE
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch
(located under the headlamp switch).
Storage Bin Location
Release Cable
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
183
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the filler pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the
flapper door while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
5. Wait five seconds before removing the
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Fuel Can Refueling
Most fuel cans will not open the flapper door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper door
to allow emergency refueling with a fuel can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire kit.
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
1 — Fuel Fill Location
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
Fuel Fill Funnel/Spare Tire/Jack And Tools
1 — Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Spare Tire
3 — Tire Changing Tools And Jack
STARTING AND OPERATING
184
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
NOTE:
Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper door open.
3. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire kit.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the fuel door is
open or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is run-
ning. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light”
to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always
place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do
not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
cause severe damage to the engine fuel sys-
tem. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel
filter and fuel tank is essential.
Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” in your Diesel Supplement for
further information, which can be found with
your online Owner’s Information.
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel
If you store quantities of fuel, good mainte-
nance of the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel
contaminated with water will promote the
growth of “microbes.” These microbes form
“slime” that will clog the fuel filtration sys-
tem and lines. Drain condensation from the
supply tank and change the line filter on a
regular basis.
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start, refer to “Dealer
Service / Priming If The Engine Has Run Out
Of Fuel” in “Servicing And Maintenance” in
your Diesel Supplement for further informa-
tion, which can be found with your online
Owner’s Information.
Emergency Fuel Fill Location
185
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure
fuel spray can cause serious injury or
death.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective
Catalytic Reduction system to meet the very
stringent diesel emissions standards re-
quired by the Environmental Protection
Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce
levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from
engines) that are harmful to our health and
the environment to a near-zero level. A small
quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is
injected into the exhaust upstream of a cata-
lyst where, when vaporized, it converts smog-
forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless
nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe.
You can operate with the comfort that your
vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier
world environment for this and generations to
come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Ex-
haust Fluid (DEF) injection system and a
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst
to meet the emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the
following components:
• DEF tank
• DEF pump
• DEF injector
• Electronically-heated DEF Lines
• NOx sensors
• Temperature sensors
• SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst
enable the achievement of diesel emissions
requirements; while maintaining outstanding
fuel economy, drivability, torque and power
ratings.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
system messages and warnings.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injec-
tion system. You may occasionally hear an
audible clicking noise from under the ve-
hicle at a stop. This is normal operation.
• The DEF pump will run for a period of time
after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation and may
be audible from the rear of the vehicle.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a
very stable product with a long shelf life. If
DEF is kept in temperatures between 10° and
90°F (-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum
of one year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest tem-
peratures. For example, DEF may freeze at
temperatures at or below 12° F (-11° C). The
system has been designed to operate in this
environment.
STARTING AND OPERATING
186
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to
know that:
• Any containers or parts that come into con-
tact with DEF must be DEF compatible
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass,
aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel
should be avoided as they are subject to
corrosion by DEF.
• If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument
cluster display) will display the level of DEF
remaining in the tank. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed,
load, etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that
is used in your vehicle.
DEF Fill Procedure
NOTE:
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the
“Technical Specifications” section for the
correct fluid type.
1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in
fuel door).
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill
inlet.
NOTE:
• The DEF gauge may take up to five
seconds to update after adding a gallon
or more of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault
related to the DEF system, the gauge
may not update to the new level. See an
authorized dealer for service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immedi-
ately update after a refill if the tempera-
ture of the DEF fluid is below 12F
(-11C). The DEF line heater will possi-
bly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
gauge to update after a period of run
time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect
the new fill level for several drives.
DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler
187
CAUTION!
•
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible dam-
age to the DEF tank from overfilling, do
not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
• DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze be-
low 12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is
designed to work in temperatures below
the DEF freezing point, however, if the
tank is overfilled and freezes, the system
could be damaged.
• When DEF is spilled, clean the area
immediately with water and use an ab-
sorbent material to soak up the spills on
the ground.
• Do not attempt to start your engine if
DEF is accidentally added to the diesel
fuel tank as it can result in severe dam-
age to your engine, including but not
limited to failure of the fuel pump and
injectors.
CAUTION!
• Never add anything other than DEF to
the tank – especially any form of hydro-
carbon such as diesel fuel, fuel system
additives, gasoline, or any other
petroleum-based product. Even a very
small amount of these, less than
100 parts per million or less than 1 oz.
(30 ml) per 78 gallons (295 liters) will
contaminate the entire DEF system and
will require replacement. If owners use a
container, funnel or nozzle when refilling
the tank, it should either be new or one
that is has only been used for adding
DEF. Mopar provides an attachable
nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately
when any of the following happen: DEF
stops flowing from the fill bottle into the
DEF fill inlet, DEF splashes out the fill
inlet, or a DEF pump nozzle automatically
shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.
STARTING AND OPERATING
188
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — Non SRT
The following chart provides the maximum
trailer weight ratings towable for your given
drivetrain:
Engine Model Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L (Std Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L (Std Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L (HD Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
3.6L (HD Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
5.7L (Std Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) 500 lbs (226 kg)
5.7L (HD Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (326 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo, and should never exceed the weight
referenced on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
The addition of passengers and cargo may
require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to
the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceed-
ing Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of
3,700 lbs (1,678 kg).
189
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — Diesel
The following chart provides the maximum
trailer weight ratings towable for your given
drivetrain:
Engine Model Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.0L Diesel 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,400 lbs (3,356 kg) 740 lbs (335 kg)
3.0L Diesel 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (326 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo, and should never exceed the weight
referenced on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
The addition of passengers and cargo may
require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to
the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceed-
ing Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of
3,700 lbs (1 678 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
190
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — SRT
Engine/Transmission
GCWR
(Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
6.2L Supercharged Auto-
matic
12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg)
6.4L Automatic 12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be consid-
ered as part of the combined weight of
occupants and cargo, and should never
exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information.
• The manufacturer does not recommend us-
ing the run flat feature while driving a
vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a
trailer.
191
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(Summit Models) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).
This hitch receiver cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at
the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
1/4 turn counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the
slot of the locking retainer if needed for
added leverage.
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (to-
wards you), pull downwards to disengage
the tabs located at the top of the hitch
receiver cover.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
Tab Locations
2 — Locking Retainers
Hitch Receiver Cover
STARTING AND OPERATING
192
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after
towing repeat the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch re-
ceiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to
installation.
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(SRT Models) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).
This hitch receiver cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at
the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
1/4 turn counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the
slot of the locking retainer if needed for
added leverage.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
Tab Locations
2 — Locking Retainers
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
Retaining Tabs
2 — Hitch Receiver Cover
3 — Locking Retainers
193
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (to-
wards you).
3. Lower back down to disengage the tabs
located at the top of the hitch receiver
cover and then pull outwards to remove.
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after
towing repeat the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch re-
ceiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to
installation.
Hitch Receiver Cover
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
Retaining Tabs
2 — Hitch Receiver Cover
3 — Locking Retainer
STARTING AND OPERATING
194
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4-LO Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4-LO Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
•
Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
Recreational towing is not allowed on SRT
vehicles.
These vehicles may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Con-
tact state and provincial Highway Safety
offices for additional details.
•
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be
placed in Transport Mode before tying them
down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed
truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in “Starting
and Operating” for more information.
If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport
mode (for example, engine will not run),
tie-downs should be fastened over the tires
using specific straps (not to the body). Fail-
ure to follow these instructions may cause
fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of
proper tie-down tension.
195
Recreational Towing-Two Wheel Drive
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accom-
plished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow ve-
hicle, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, de-
signed for towing, to secure the front
wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These
models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position
in the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/
Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEU-
TRAL (N) and the transmission must be in
PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL
(N) selection button is adjacent to the trans-
fer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place
with the selector switch in any mode position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
196
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle.
Towing with only one set of wheels on the
ground (front or rear) will cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case dam-
age. Tow with all four wheels either ON
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a
vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case dam-
age. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper
face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-
mission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing
to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se-
lector switch) for four seconds. The light
behind the N symbol will blink, indicating
shift in progress.
197
The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is com-
plete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM
IN NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
instrument cluster.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEU-
TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU-
TRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case
in NEUTRAL, push and hold the EN-
GINE START/STOP button until the en-
gine turns off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button
twice (without pressing the brake pedal),
to turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle
using a suitable tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no
longer met during the shift, then the NEU-
TRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until
the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the igni-
tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift
air suspension, the engine should be
started and left running for a minimum of
60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
198
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se-
lector switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) but-
ton. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has
been released, the transfer case will shift
to the position indicated by the selector
switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn
the engine OFF.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, re-
lease the brake pedal, and check that
the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL
(N) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the igni-
tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
199
200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS................202
Control ....................202
BULB REPLACEMENT ........202
Replacement Bulbs .............202
Bulb Replacement .............204
FUSES ...................207
General Information.............208
Underhood Fuses ..............208
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING ................212
Run Flat Tires — SRT Models.......212
Jack Location ................213
Preparations For Jacking .........213
Jacking Instructions ............214
Road Tire Installation ............217
JUMPSTARTING ............218
Preparations For Jump Start........218
Jump Starting Procedure..........219
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . .220
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS ...............221
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ......221
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . .223
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE .................224
Two-Wheel Drive Models ..........225
Four-Wheel Drive Models .........226
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .226
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS). . . .226
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)....................227
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
201
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
Control
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the switch bank just above the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warn-
ing flasher. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition
is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
flashers may discharge the battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
202
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamps (Low Beam) — If Equipped H11
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) D3S (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Headlamps (High Beam) — If Equipped H9
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps
H11
LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker — If Equipped W5W
Premium Front Side Marker — If Equipped LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp — If Equipped 7444NA (WY28/8W)
Rear Body Side Backup Lamp 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Body Side Stop/Turn Lamps 3157KRD LCP (P27/7W)
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
CHMSL - Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized
dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your
authorized dealer or refer to the applicable
Service Manual.
203
Bulb Replacement
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
— If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in
the circuit even with the headlamp switch off
and the key removed. Because of this, you
should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps when the headlamp switch is
turned ON. It may cause serious electrical
shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the head-
lamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes
more white after approximately 10 seconds,
as the system charges.
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back to vapor. Turn-
ing the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
NOTE:
• The air filter housing must be removed.
• The windshield washer reservoir may
need to be rotated out of the way by
removing the fastener.
• Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will
need to be repositioned by removing
the fasteners, and moving the unit out
of the way.
3. To access the low beam bulb you must
remove the rubber boot seal from back-
side of the lamp housing.
NOTE:
Ensure the rubber boot is properly rein-
stalled to prevent water and moisture from
entering the lamp.
CAUTION!
•
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allow-
ing it to contact other oily surfaces.
Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size
or type may overheat and cause damage
to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
4. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–
quarter turn counterclockwise to remove
from housing.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
204
Front Turn Signal Lamp
The front turn signal lamps are LEDs. See
your authorized dealer for service.
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
NOTE:
• The air filter housing must be removed.
• The windshield washer reservoir may
need to be rotated out of the way by
removing the fastener.
• Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will
need to be repositioned by removing the
fasteners, and moving the unit out of
the way.
3. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fin-
gers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail
lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rear-
ward to disengage the lamp from the ap-
erture panel.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
205
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and re-
move from lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket,
and reattach the lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim
from the liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
Rear Of Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Re-
move
3 — Backup Bulb Socket
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
Liftgate Lower Trim
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
206
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate sock-
et(s) counter clockwise.
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s).
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate
trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is an
LED. Service at an authorized dealer.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See your
authorized dealer for service.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with
the same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Do not place a fuse inside a
circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Fail-
ure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disen-
gaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
•
If a general protection fuse for safety sys-
tems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do
Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
207
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery dis-
charge.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in
the engine compartment near the battery.
This center contains cartridge fuses, micro
fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A descrip-
tion of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the
inside cover that corresponds to the following
chart.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension — If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake Vacuum Pump
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3/Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor Front
Power Distribution Center
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
208
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
F15 40 Amp Green – LTR (Low Temperature Radiator) Engine Cooling Pump
F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lights #1
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink – Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped
F32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential Control
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If Equipped
F40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
209
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security Gateway
F49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differential - If Equipped
F51 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module/Keyless Ignition/Steering Column Lock
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
F59 – 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F61 – 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor (Diesel engine only)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof/Passenger Window Switches/Rain Sensor
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free Module — If Equipped
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 30 Amp Green Audio Amplifier
F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM — If Equipped
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
210
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power Steering
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener/Anti-Intrusion Module
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTV
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster/SGW
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera/ParkSense
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger — If Equipped
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Ventilated Seats/Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/DSRC
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams — If Equipped
211
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure
the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water
to get into the power distribution center
and possibly result in an electrical sys-
tem failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor-
tant to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with
a rating other than indicated may result
in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues
to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected.
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
Run Flat Tires — SRT Models
SRT models are equipped with “run flat”
tires. Run flat tires allow the vehicle to be
driven approximately 50 miles (80 km) at
55 mph (88 km/h). Tire service should be
obtained to avoid prolonged run flat feature
usage.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” is
illuminated. Vehicle handling and braking
may be reduced. You could have a collision
and be severely or fatally injured.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
212
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools
are located in the rear cargo area, below the
load floor.
Preparations For Jacking
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the
correct jacking points. Failure to follow
this information could cause damage to
the vehicle or underbody components.
NOTE:
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system (if equipped) has a fea-
ture which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle closest to moving traffic,
pull far enough off the road to avoid being
hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking posi-
tion. For example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the ve-
hicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Spare Tire/Jack And Tools
1 — Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Spare Tire
3 — Tire Changing Tools And Jack
Wheel Blocked
213
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift,
refer to “Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information on dis-
abling automatic leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warn-
ings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set
the transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when
it is on a jack.
WARNING!
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is
on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indi-
cated and for lifting this vehicle during a
tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or in-
flated, are securely stowed, spares must
be stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by
jacking on locations other than those indi-
cated in the Jacking Instructions for this
vehicle.
Warning Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
214
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools
from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn,
while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the
body flange just behind the front tire as
indicated by the triangular lift point sym-
bol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on
the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of
the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding). Do
not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is fully engaged.
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side
sill molding. Be sure the jack is placed in
Jack And Tools Assembled
Jacking Locations
Front Jacking Location
215
CAUTION!
the proper engagement location on the
inside of the panel. Damage of the vehicle
may occur if the procedure is not properly
followed.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack
screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only
until the tire just clears the surface and
enough clearance is obtained to install
the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove
the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the ve-
hicle and install the lug nuts with the
cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the inflatable spare
tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack
screw counterclockwise, and remove the
jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage.
Rear Jacking Location
Installing Spare Wheel/Tire
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
216
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern
until each nut has been tightened twice.
For correct lug nut torque, refer to
“Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed posi-
tion and return it and the tools to the
proper positions in the foam tray.
12. Remove the small center cap and se-
curely store the road wheel in the cargo
area.
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible, properly
secure the spare tire with the special
wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray,
and latch the rear load floor cover.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for
more than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-
paired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the nut toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
Spare Tire
217
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications” for proper lug
nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under
the passenger's front seat. There are remote
terminals located under the hood to assist in
jump starting.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling
fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON.
You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Jump Starting Locations
(+) — Remote Positive Post
(-) — Remote Negative Post
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
218
WARNING!
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do
not touch each other, or either vehicle, until
properly connected for jump starting.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK and turn
the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec-
essary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the re-
mote positive (+) battery post. Pull up-
ward on the cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other
as this could establish a ground connec-
tion and personal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting proce-
dure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged ve-
hicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other
or either vehicle while making connections.
If frequent jump starting is required to start
your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at your authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehi-
cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis-
charge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Cable Connection
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
219
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has
the booster battery, let the engine idle a
few minutes, and then start the engine in
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine
above 2000 rpm since it provides no
charging benefit, wastes fuel and can
damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Cable Disconnection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega-
tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi-
tive (+) jumper cable from the remote
positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is
located in the spare tire storage area. If your
vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can
is needed, insert the funnel into the filler
neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel
System refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in
“Starting And Operating”.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
220
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in-
crease the engine idle speed while prevent-
ing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows
the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from
the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop
the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully apply-
ing the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you
should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
activating the Manual Park Release. Acti-
vating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured
by the parking brake, or by proper connec-
tion to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where
the transmission will not shift out of PARK
(such as a dead battery), a Manual Park
Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
221
2. Open the center console and locate the
Manual Park Release cover, remove it by
snapping the cover away from the console
hinges.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push
the metal latch in towards the tether
strap.
5. While the metal latch is in the open posi-
tion, pull upward on the tether strap until
the lever clicks and latches in the re-
leased position. The transmission is now
out of PARK and the vehicle can be
moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park
Release is activated may damage the
Manual Park Release mechanism, the
transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling uninten-
tionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Le-
ver:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release,
apply tension upward while pushing the
release latch towards the tether to unlock
the lever.
2. Once the tension has been released and
the lever has been unlocked, be sure it is
stowed properly and locks into position.
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it
back in place.
Manual Park Release Cover Removed
Released Position
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
222
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear the area around the front wheels.
Push and hold the lock button on the gear
selector. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing
the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two sec-
onds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking mo-
tion without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Con-
trol” in “Safety” in the Owner's Manual for
further information. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again
to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode
and injure someone. Do not spin your ve-
hicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the
wheels may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will mini-
mize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shift-
ing between DRIVE and REVERSE, do
not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the
wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also dam-
age the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
223
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing
a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled vehicles may also be
towed as described under “Recreational Tow-
ing” in “Starting And Operating”.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them
down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed
truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in “Starting
And Operating” for more information. If the
vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode
(for example, engine will not run), tie-downs
must be fastened to the axles (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions
may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause
loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD LOW Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4WD LOW Range
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See instructions in
“Recreational Towing”
•
Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
SRT vehicles and 4WD models without 4WD
LOW range should only be towed with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
224
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required
to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only
tow bars and other equipment designed for
this purpose, following equipment manufac-
turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the
vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack-
ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, de-
frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park
Release” in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
CAUTION!
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to
your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this sec-
tion for instructions on shifting the transmis-
sion to NEUTRAL when the engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km),
tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on
a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and
the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when
using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to
hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels on the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
225
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with
all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable meth-
ods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with
one end of vehicle raised and the opposite
end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a
two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL
(N) and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” for detailed instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed trans-
fer case have no NEUTRAL position, and
therefore must be towed with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
•
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the
ground). Internal damage to the transmis-
sion or transfer case will occur if a front or
rear wheel lift is used when towing.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case dam-
age. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks,
there will be one in the rear and two mounted
on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will
be located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to
use both of the front tow hooks to minimize
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING!
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling
with tow hooks. Tow straps may become
disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) function.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
226
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in under-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed
under certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit-
ting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
227
228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ......230
Scheduled Servicing — Non-SRT . . . .230
Scheduled Servicing — SRT .......233
Scheduled Servicing — Diesel Engine .238
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .....242
3.6L Engine .................242
5.7L Engine .................243
6.2L Supercharged Engine ........244
6.4L Engine .................245
3.0L Diesel Engine .............246
Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine .247
Checking Oil Level — 3.0 Diesel
Engine.....................247
Adding Washer Fluid ............247
Maintenance-Free Battery ........248
DEALERSERVICE...........248
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......249
Windshield Wiper Blades .........251
Cooling System ...............255
Brake System ................255
Automatic Transmission ..........256
RAISINGTHEVEHICLE .......257
TIRES....................257
Tire Safety Information ..........257
Tires — General Information .......265
Tire Types ...................269
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........270
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .......272
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) —
Non-SRT ...................273
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — SRT . .274
Tire Rotation Recommendations .....274
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .......275
Treadwear ...................275
Traction Grades ...............276
Temperature Grades.............276
INTERIORS................276
Seats And Fabric Parts ...........276
Plastic And Coated Parts..........277
Leather Parts.................277
Glass Surfaces ...............278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
229
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Scheduled Servicing — Non-SRT
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as fre-
quent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel
usage will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe op-
erating conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos-
sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run
time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours
of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles
(6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time
if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and
off-road environment, or is operated pre-
dominantly at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered
Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-
voir, brake master cylinder and fill as
needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
230
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the follow-
ing pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Change oil and filter.
•
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
•
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
•
Inspect exhaust system.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
231
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change
if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
Change transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
**
The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
232
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a com-
petent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)
or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environ-
ment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Scheduled Servicing — SRT
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed
in this manual must be done at the times or
mileages specified to protect your vehicle
warranty and ensure the best vehicle perfor-
mance and reliability. More frequent mainte-
nance may be needed for vehicles in severe
operating conditions, such as dusty areas and
very short trip driving. Inspection and service
should also be done anytime a malfunction is
suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind
you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
The instrument cluster display will display an
“Oil Change Required” message and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil
change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not
monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six
months since your last oil change, even if
the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you
drive your vehicle off-road for an extended
period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km)
or six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil
change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described un-
der “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in this
guide.
233
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine
Compartment” in this section for further
information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and
add if required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten
the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-
voir, engine oil, brake master cylinder, and
add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items
for correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required mainte-
nance items may result in damage to the
vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
234
Maintenance Plan
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and engine
oil filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before scheduled mainte-
nance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: dusty or off-road condi-
tions. Inspect the engine air
cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings; replace
if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X X
Adjust the parking brake on ve-
hicles equipped with four wheel
disc brakes.
XXXXX
Drain the transfer case and refill. X X X X X
235
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Inspect the accessory drive belts
replace if necessary.
XX
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid. Change if using your vehicle
for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
XXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and boot seals, for cracks or
leaks and all parts for damage,
wear, improper looseness or end
play; replace if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner fil-
ter.
XXXXX
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve
if necessary
X
Replace the spark plugs – 6.2L
Supercharged Engine. **
XX
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
236
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L
Engine. **
X
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 120 months if not done at
150,000 miles (240,000 km).
XX
**
The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a com-
petent mechanic.
WARNING!
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
237
Scheduled Servicing — Diesel Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as fre-
quent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions will
cause the change oil message to illuminate
more frequently. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil
change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described un-
der “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in this
guide.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
or twelve months, whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the
housing when the new filter is installed if the
residual oil is not either removed from the
housing or enough time has not elapsed to
allow the oil to drain back into the engine.
When servicing the oil filter on this engine,
carefully remove the filter and use a suction
gun to remove any residual oil left in the
housing or wait about 30 minutes for the oil
to drain back into the engine.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-
voir, brake master cylinder, and fill as
needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
238
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To B5 Biodiesel
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the follow-
ing pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Change oil and filter.
•
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
•
Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
•
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
•
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
•
Inspect exhaust system.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Change fuel filter.
239
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle
for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter assembly.
Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not exceed
20,000 miles (32 000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Change transfer case fluid. X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
240
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a com-
petent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
Additional Maintenance —
B6 To B20 Biodiesel
NOTE:
• Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12 875 km)
or six months, whichever comes first when
using Biodiesel blends greater than 5%
(B5).
• The owner is required to monitor mileage
for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil
change indicator system does not reflect
the use of biofuels.
• Fuel filter change interval is maintained at
every second oil change. This is especially
important with biodiesel usage.
241
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Filter Access 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
242
5.7L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
243
6.2L Supercharged Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Fill
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
11 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
244
6.4L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
245
3.0L Diesel Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Coolant Pressure Reservoir
9 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
246
Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best
time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is
shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings. Always maintain the oil level
within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding
one quart of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a
reading at the top of the safe zone on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase
will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure.
This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 3.0 Diesel Engine
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals. The best time to check the oil level
is before starting the engine after it has been
parked overnight. When checking oil after
operating the engine, first ensure the engine
is at full operating temperature, then wait for
five minutes after engine shutdown to check
the oil.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings. Add oil only when the level on
the dipstick is below the “MIN” mark. The
total capacity from the MIN mark to the MAX
mark is 1 qt (1 L).
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase
will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pres-
sure. This could damage your engine.
NOTE:
It is possible for your oil level to be slightly
higher than a previous check. This would be
due to diesel fuel that may temporarily be in
the crankcase due to operation of the diesel
particulate filter regeneration strategy. This
fuel will evaporate out under normal opera-
tion.
Never operate the engine with oil level below
the “MIN” mark or above the upper “MAX”
mark.
Adding Washer Fluid
The instrument cluster display will indicate
when the washer fluid level is low. When the
sensor detects a low fluid level, the wind-
shield will light on the vehicle graphic outline
and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message
will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer is shared. The
fluid reservoir is located in the engine com-
partment, be sure to check the fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent only (not radiator anti-
freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reser-
247
voir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a
cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper
blades, this will help blade performance. To
prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the tempera-
ture range of your climate. This rating infor-
mation can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-
free battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,
skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce-
dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the nega-
tive post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identi-
fied on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the
battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both
vehicle battery cables before connecting
the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting volt-
age.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified ser-
vice personnel, special tools, and equipment
to perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be-
fore attempting any procedure yourself.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
248
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a ser-
vice job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air con-
ditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning
of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufac-
turer for your air conditioning system.
Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you.
Other unapproved refrigerants or lubri-
cants can cause the system to fail, re-
quiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, for further warranty
information.
•
The air conditioning system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
risk of personal injury or damage to the
system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected should
be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement
(A/C Air Filter)
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this sec-
tion for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the
cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your
eyes, resulting in personal injury.
249
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air
inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform
the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. There are glove compartment travel stops
on both sides of the glove compartment
door, partially close the glove compart-
ment door and push inward to release the
glove compartment travel stop on one side
and repeat this procedure for the opposite
side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove com-
partment door toward the rear of the ve-
hicle to disengage the glove compartment
door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment
door from its hinges, there will be some
resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door and lifting the clip out of glove com-
partment door.
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging
the retaining tab and mid way snap that
secures the filter cover to the HVAC hous-
ing. Disengage the mid way snap by pull-
ing the door outward. Unhinge the filter
cover on the right side to fully remove the
cover.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
250
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on
the filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, make sure the
retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an
arrow to indicate airflow direction through
the filter. Failure to properly install the
filter will result in the need to replace it
more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on
the door hinge and reattach the tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove compart-
ment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position
to reengage the glove compartment travel
stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door
hinges and glove compartment travel
stops are fully engaged.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades
and the windshield periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.
This will remove accumulations of salt or road
film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost
or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum prod-
ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de-
pending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following
points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper
arm or blade that is damaged.
251
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade
in place or the glass may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in
the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the
wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the
wiper blade and while holding the wiper
arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab
In Locked Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade With Release Tab
In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
252
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle
to separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until
the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of the
wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the
glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away
from the glass to allow the rear wiper
blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised
off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot
cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully
raise the rear wiper arm without unsnap-
ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage
the vehicle.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Rear Wiper
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
253
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. 3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper
arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an
audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
254
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away
from the glass to allow the rear wiper
blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised
off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot
cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully
raise the rear wiper arm without unsnap-
ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage
the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts auto-
matically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or
turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The
fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec-
tion every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the sys-
tem should be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any accu-
mulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the en-
tire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be in-
spected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-
nance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
255
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal
can result in abnormally high brake tem-
peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. You would not have
your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should
be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced,
or immediately if the brake system warning
light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring
level within the designated marks on the side
of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylin-
der area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should
be checked when pads are replaced. If the
brake fluid is abnormally low, check the sys-
tem for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its per-
formance. The proper type of brake fluid
for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic mas-
ter cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign
matter or moisture, use only new brake
fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs
moisture from the air resulting in a lower
boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake fail-
ure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot en-
gine parts, causing the brake fluid to
WARNING!
catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these
surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and
does not require adjustment under normal
operating conditions. Routine fluid level
checks are not required; therefore the trans-
mission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using
special service tools. If you notice fluid leak-
age or transmission malfunction, visit an au-
thorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
256
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires
have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/
65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the same
as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Stan-
dards Code
(TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size Desig-
nation
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service
Description
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
257
• Temporary spare tires are designed for tem-
porary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter
“T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Ex-
ample: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
258
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however, the date code may only be on
one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have
the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
259
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway
use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front
door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting
for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pres-
sure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
260
Term Definition
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
261
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must
not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the
tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of your Owner’s Manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded.
To determine the maximum loading condi-
tions of your vehicle, locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli-
cable) should never exceed the weight refer-
enced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
262
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity calculated in Step
4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows ex-
amples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants.
This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
263
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
264
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stop-
ping distance. Use tires of the recom-
mended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by
improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that re-
sult in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail sud-
denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steer-
ing problems. You could lose control of
your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over respon-
siveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side
may cause erratic and unpredictable steer-
ing response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
tion.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
265
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge
of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could dam-
age the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard
are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to
a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking
tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F
(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure
should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for
this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain-
ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve-
hicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
266
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repair-
able).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofan
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re-
pairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat
tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid
loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the
run flat mode it has limited driving capabili-
ties and needs to be replaced immediately. A
Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while
a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con-
ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 sec-
onds continuously when you are stuck, and
do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
267
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves. They will appear as
bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These ab-
normal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating
of V or higher, and Summer tires typically
have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these
tires per the vehicle scheduled mainte-
nance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,
and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal-
ance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi-
cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
268
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in
the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with
any questions you may have on tire specifica-
tions or capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified
for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may
change suspension dimensions and per-
formance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling, and brak-
WARNING!
ing of your vehicle. This can cause un-
predictable handling and stress to steer-
ing and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was origi-
nally equipped on your vehicle. Using a
tire with a smaller load index could re-
sult in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedom-
eter and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all sea-
sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all
season tires. All season tires can be identified
by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet
and dry conditions, and are not intended to
be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less
than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
269
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con-
ditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent
in size and type to the
original equipment
tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four;
failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sus-
tained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres-
sures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of non-
studded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in
the Owner’s Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an auto-
matic car wash with a compact or limited
use temporary spare installed. Damage to
the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare
tire and wheel equivalent in look and func-
tion to the original equipment tire and wheel
found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rota-
tion for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for
the recommended tire rotation pattern.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
270
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. You can identify if your ve-
hicle is equipped with a compact spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de-
scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. You can identify if your ve-
hicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the collapsible
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
271
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by
a label located on the limited use spare
wheel. This label contains the driving limita-
tions for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated
to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-
num and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph)
soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the
body of the vehicle and remember to always
wash when the surfaces are not hot to the
touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other
road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They
can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar-
ket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ-
ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken
in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning
chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
272
Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-
acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle
and apply the brakes to remove the water
droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake
rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when
braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing com-
pounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis; this is all that is re-
quired to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — Non-SRT
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-
to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-
dations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Pro
or equivalent is recommended on P245/
70R17, 265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could
lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other sus-
pension components, it is important that
only traction devices in good condition
are used. Broken devices can cause se-
rious damage. Stop the vehicle immedi-
ately if noise occurs that could indicate
device breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
273
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufactur-
er’s instructions on the method of instal-
lation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested oper-
ating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a com-
pact spare tire.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — SRT
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-
to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-
dations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, RUD-GRIP
4X4 or Equivalent is recommended on
295/45R20 tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles
can cause unpredictable handling. You
could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other sus-
pension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indi-
cate device breakage. Remove the dam-
aged parts of the device before further
use.
CAUTION!
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufactur-
er’s instructions on the method of instal-
lation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested oper-
ating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a com-
pact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform differ-
ent steering, handling, and braking func-
tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
274
These effects can be reduced by timely rota-
tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are
especially worthwhile with aggressive tread
designs such as those on On/Off-Road type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,
and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals. More frequent
rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System
will automatically locate the pressure values
displayed in the correct vehicle position fol-
lowing a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the
“rearward-cross” shown in the following dia-
gram.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Tire Rotation
275
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of as-
phalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not in-
clude acceleration, cornering, hy-
droplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is prop-
erly inflated and not overloaded. Ex-
cessive speed, under-inflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-
stery and carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flam-
mable, and if used in closed areas they
may cause respiratory harm.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
276
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry
with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or
worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be re-
placed after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco-
rated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immedi-
ately.
• Damage caused by these type of prod-
ucts may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean
damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily
with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care
should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de-
tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to main-
tain the original condition.
277
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it
tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and
fabric dye transfer more so than darker col-
ors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and FCA recommends Mopar total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the
leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based
and/or Ketone based cleaning products to
clean leather seats, as damage to the seat
may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass
cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or
windows equipped with radio antennas. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are
using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the
mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
278
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA .......280
Vehicle Identification Number ......280
WHEEL AND TIRE
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . .281
Torque Specifications............281
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
GASOLINEENGINE..........282
3.6L Engine .................282
5.7L Engine .................282
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine . .282
Materials Added To Fuel .........283
FUEL REQUIREMENTS –
DIESEL ENGINE.............283
Diesel Fuel Specifications ........284
FLUID CAPACITIES —
NONSRT..................285
FLUIDCAPACITIES—SRT.....285
FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL . .286
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —
NON-SRT .................287
Engine.....................287
Chassis ....................288
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —
SRT......................289
Engine.....................289
Chassis ....................289
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE .........290
Engine.....................290
Chassis ....................291
MOPARACCESSORIES........291
Authentic Accessories By Mopar .....291
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
279
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
found on a label located on the left front
corner of the instrument panel pad, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the wind-
shield. This number also is stamped on the
right front floor, behind the right front seat.
Move the right front seat forward to allow
better viewing of the stamped VIN. This num-
ber also appears on the Automobile Informa-
tion Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number
and optional equipment.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Windshield VIN Label Location Right Front Body VIN Location
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
280
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re-
moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug
nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality
six sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Base Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
SRT Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
110 Ft-Lbs
(149 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recom-
mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove
any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion
or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern
until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the
lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/
bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/
bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
Torque Pattern
281
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
GASOLINE ENGINE
3.6L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
These engines are de-
signed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and
provide optimum fuel
economy and perfor-
mance when using high
quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline
having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not re-
quired, as it will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-
ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-
tions. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed
to meet all emissions
regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel
economy and perfor-
mance when using
high-quality unleaded
gasoline having an oc-
tane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
“Plus” gasoline is recommended for opti-
mum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-
ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-
tions. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
These engines are de-
signed to meet all emis-
sions regulations, pro-
vide optimal fuel
economy and perfor-
mance when using
high-quality unleaded
“Premium” gasoline
RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING
(R+M)/2 METHOD
87
RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING
(R+M)/2 METHOD
89
RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING
(R+M)/2 METHOD
91
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
282
having a posted octane number of 91 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is
required in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking
sound from the engine is not a cause for
concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a
lower than recommended octane number can
cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-
tions. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level
of detergents to further
aide in minimizing en-
gine and fuel system
deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish re-
moval may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas-
ket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS –
DIESEL ENGINE
Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel
fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage
to the emissions control system.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM
(formerly known as the American Society for
Testing and Materials) specification
D-975 Grade S15 will provide good perfor-
mance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme
cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to
operate at colder-than-normal conditions for
prolonged periods, use climatized No. 2 die-
sel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with
50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide
better protection from fuel gelling or wax-
plugging of the fuel filters.
283
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable un-
der certain conditions and hazardous or
explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of wa-
ter. To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
accumulated water from the fuel/water sepa-
rator using the fuel/water separator drain pro-
vided on the fuel filter housing. If you buy
good quality fuel and follow the cold weather
advice above, fuel conditioners should not be
required in your vehicle. If available in your
area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel
may offer improved cold-starting and
warm-up performance.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” re-
mains on, DO NOT START engine before
you drain the water from the fuel filter(s) to
avoid engine damage. Refer to “Draining
Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” in your Diesel Supple-
ment for further information, which can be
found with your online Owner’s Informa-
tion.
Diesel Fuel Specifications
This diesel engine has been developed to
take advantage of the high energy content
and generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low
Sulfur diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
climatized diesel fuels.
NOTE:
• If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with
gasoline on your diesel vehicle, do not start
the engine. Damage to the engine and fuel
system could occur. Please call your autho-
rized dealer for service.
• A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used
with your diesel engine without any adjust-
ments to regular service schedules.
• Commercially available fuel additives are
not necessary for the proper operation of
your diesel engine.
• No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should
only be used where extended arctic condi-
tions (-10°F or -23°C) exist.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
284
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON SRT
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
5.7L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.2 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 8.3 Quarts 7.8 Liters
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
285
U.S. Metric
Cooling System*
6.2L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
6.2L Engine Intercooler (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
4.0 Quarts 3.9 Liters
6.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
16 Quarts 15.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Diesel Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 8 Gallons 30.3 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic,
API CJ-4)
8 Quarts 7.7 Liters
Cooling System
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine (Mopar Engine
Coolant/Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology))
12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
286
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRT
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze)
other than specified Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze), may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
CAUTION!
freeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT cool-
ant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or an-
tirust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
287
CAUTION!
• This vehicle has not been designed for
use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene
glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier.
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3,
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
288
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
Engine/Intercooler Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum
Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine
oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Selec-Track) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with integrated friction
modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3,
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
289
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar or Shell Rotella that meets FCA Material
Standard MS-10902 and the API CJ-4 engine oil category is required.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
Fuel Filters We recommend you use Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the
manufacturers filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Fuel Selection Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system. For most
year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975 with your diesel
engine.This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the
ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold
(below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate
at colder-than-normal conditions for pro-
longed periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel
fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50%
No. 1 diesel fuel.
This will provide better protection from fuel
gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
290
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier
additive.
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain
far more than expressive style, premium pro-
tection, or extreme entertainment, you also
benefit from enhancing your vehicle with ac-
cessories that have been thoroughly tested
and factory-approved.
291
The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your
Jeep Grand Cherokee.
EXTERIOR:
• Front End Cover • Window Air Deflectors • Molded Splash Guards
• Wheels • Skid Plates • Tow Hooks
• Tubular Side Steps • Hitch Receiver • Front Air Deflector
INTERIOR:
• Carpet Floor Mats • Katzkin Leather Interiors • Cargo Net
• All-weather Floor Mats • Footwell Lighting • Bright Pedal Kit
• Cargo Barrier • Molded Cargo Tray • Door Sill Guards
ELECTRONICS:
• Remote Start • Mopar Connect • Rear View Camera
• Park Distance Sensors
CARRIERS:
• Sport Utility Bars • Roof Box Cargo Carrier • Roof Mount Bike Carrier
• Roof Mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Roof Mount Water Sports Carrier • Roof Mount Cargo Basket and Cargo Net
For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso-
ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and
mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
292
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ...........295
OFFROADPAGES—
IFEQUIPPED...............296
Off Road Pages Status Bar ........297
Vehicle Dynamics ..............297
Suspension ..................298
Pitch And Roll ................298
Accessory Gauges ..............299
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped .......299
UCONNECT 4 WITH
7-INCH DISPLAY ............300
Uconnect 4 At A Glance .........300
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...........301
Radio .....................302
Android Auto — If Equipped .......303
Apple CarPlay Integration —
If Equipped..................304
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH
8.4-INCHDISPLAY ..........306
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance . . .306
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...........307
Radio .....................308
Android Auto — If Equipped .......309
Apple CarPlay Integration —
If Equipped..................313
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN —
IFEQUIPPED...............315
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display) ..........315
SiriusXM Guardian Activation ......316
Download The Uconnect App .......317
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect
4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display). . . .317
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account ...................317
Built-In Features ..............317
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . .320
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION .....322
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......322
Reception Conditions ............323
Care And Maintenance ...........323
Anti-Theft Protection ............323
UCONNECT SETTINGS........323
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER
CONTROL.................324
Audio Jack (AUX) ..............324
USB Port ...................324
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ........325
UCONNECT REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...............325
Getting Started ...............325
Dual Video Screen..............327
Blu-ray Disc Player .............327
Play Video Games ..............329
Accessibility — If Equipped........330
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . .330
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume ....................330
Finding Points Of Interest .........332
Finding A Place By Spelling
The Name...................332
One-Step Voice Destination Entry . . . .332
Setting Your Home Location........332
MULTIMEDIA
293
Home .....................333
Adding A Stop ................334
Taking A Detour ...............334
SiriusXM Traffic Plus
(4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display) .....334
SiriusXM Travel Link
(4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display) .....334
UCONNECT PHONE ..........336
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth
Hands Free Calling).............336
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile
Phone To The Uconnect System .....338
Common Phone Commands
(Examples) ..................341
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call ..................341
Transfer Ongoing Call Between
Handset And Vehicle ............341
Phonebook ..................341
Voice Command Tips ............342
Changing The Volume ...........342
Using Do Not Disturb ............342
Incoming Text Messages .........343
Helpful Tips And Common Questions
To Improve Bluetooth Performance
With Your Uconnect System .......344
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICKTIPS................344
Introducing Uconnect ...........344
Get Started ..................345
Basic Voice Commands...........346
Radio .....................346
Media .....................346
Phone .....................347
Voice Text Reply ...............348
Climate ....................349
Navigation (4C NAV) ............349
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)—
If Equipped..................350
Register (4C/4C NAV)............350
Vehicle Health Report/Alert
(4C/4C NAV) .................350
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)..........351
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ......351
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ......351
Do Not Disturb................352
Android Auto — If Equipped .......353
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped .......353
General Information.............354
Additional Information ...........355
MULTIMEDIA
294
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wire-
less networks. These networks allow your ve-
hicle to send and receive information. This
information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys-
tems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup-
pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps
as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the po-
tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac-
cess to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if
the most recent version of vehicle software
(such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all
of the possible outcomes if your vehi-
cle’s systems are breached. It may be
possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,
or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious soft-
ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to
your nearest authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
– Routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com/
support/software-update.html (U.S.
Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communi-
cations cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to ”Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual.
295
OFF ROAD PAGES —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with Off Road
Pages, which provides the vehicle status
while operating on off road conditions. It
supplies information relating to the vehicle
ride height, the status of the transfer case,
the pitch and roll of the vehicle (if equipped),
and the active Selec-Terrain mode.
To access Off Road Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, and then select
“Off Road Pages”.
Off Road Pages has the following selectable
pages:
• Vehicle Dynamics
• Suspension
• Pitch and Roll — If Equipped
• Accessory Gauge
• Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
Main Menu
1 — Off Road Pages App
2 — Uconnect Apps Button
MULTIMEDIA
296
Off Road Pages Status Bar
The Off Road Pages Status Bar is located
along the bottom of Off Road Pages and is
present in each of the five selectable page
options. It provides continually updating in-
formation for the following items:
• Current Transfer Case Status (only appears
when in 4WD LOW)
• Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped
• Current Latitude/Longitude
• Current Altitude of the vehicle
• Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control
and Selected Speed in MPH (km/h)
Vehicle Dynamics
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays informa-
tion concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
• Steering angle in degrees
• Status of Transfer case
• Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Status Bar
1 — Transfer Case Status
(Only when in 4WD LOW)
2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped
3 — Current Latitude/Longitude
4 — Current Altitude
5 — Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Status
and Set Speed
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Front Axle Locker Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
297
Suspension
The Suspension page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
• Suspension Articulation Indicator
• Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped
– Normal
– Off Road 1
– Off Road 2
– Entry/Exit
– Aero
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by
a yellow color in the Suspension Articulation
Indicator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride
Height indicator on the screen will switch to
the appropriate height and the Suspension
Articulation Indicator will show the move-
ment and change in height.
Pitch And Roll
The Pitch And Roll page displays the vehi-
cle’s current pitch (angle up and down) and
roll (angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch
and roll gauges provide a visualization of the
current vehicle angle.
Suspension Menu
1 — Suspension Articulation Indicator
2 — Current Ride Height
Pitch And Roll Menu
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
MULTIMEDIA
298
Accessory Gauges
The Accessory Gauges page displays the cur-
rent status of the vehicle’s Coolant Tempera-
ture, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Ve-
hicles Only), Transmission Temperature, and
Battery Voltage.
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will
alter the image on the screen. The vehicle
must be in the ON/RUN position to display
Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
• Snow
• Sand
• Auto — Default
• Mud
• Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4 Wheel Drive
Low
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off
Road Pages Status Bar will also display the
current Selec-Terrain mode.
Accessory Gauges Menu
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
299
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH
DISPLAY
Uconnect 4 At A Glance
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to
the screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
Setting The Time
• For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then
press the time display at the top of the
screen. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press
the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out
of the Clock Setting screen.
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed
Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loud-
ness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and
Radio Off With Door.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the bands.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
Screen
MULTIMEDIA
300
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-
justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the auto-
matic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Loudness — If Equipped
• Press the “On” button on the touchscreen
to activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deac-
tivate this feature. When Loudness is On,
the sound quality at lower volumes
improves.
AUX Volume Offset
• Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on
the touchscreen to activate the AUX Vol-
ume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset
is adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–”
buttons. This alters the AUX input audio
volume. The level value, which spans be-
tween plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
• Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The
Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and
“Off.” With Auto Play on, music begins
playing from a connected device, immedi-
ately after it is connected to the radio.
Auto On Radio — If Equipped
• The Radio automatically turns on when
vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was
on or off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
• Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on
the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off
With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door
feature, when activated, keeps the radio on
until the driver or passenger door is opened,
or when the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience.
Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now
be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is
in PARK.
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
301
Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — Main Category Bar
5 — Audio Settings
6 — Seek Up
7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
8 — Seek Down
9 — Browse And Manage Presets
10 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
302
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-
dio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and en-
tering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone
and a number of its apps onto the touch-
screen radio display. Android Auto automati-
cally brings you useful information, and orga-
nizes it into simple cards that appear just
when they are needed. Android Auto can be
used with Google's best-in-class speech tech-
nology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the
radio display’s touchscreen to control many
of your apps. To use Android Auto follow the
following steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-
powered smartphone.
303
2. Connect your Android powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in
your vehicle. If you have not downloaded
the Android Auto app to your smartphone
before plugging in the device for the first
time, the app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as af-
termarket cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the
use of the Android Auto app before use.
3. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, Android Auto should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by
touching the Android Auto icon on the
touchscreen, located under Apps.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your smartphone’s data
plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,
etc. for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu-
nication
• Hundred of compatible apps, and many
more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto
may use cellular data and your cellular cov-
erage is shown in the upper right corner of the
radio screen. Once Android Auto has made a
connection through USB, Android Auto will
also connect via Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down-
load app on Google Play. Android, Android
Auto and Google Play are trademarks of
Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Android Auto
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
MULTIMEDIA
304
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car-
Play, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using
iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-
tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the
very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, CarPlay should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by
touching the CarPlay icon on the touch-
screen, located under Apps.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-
erage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
305
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV
WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
WARNING!
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to
the screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
Setting The Time
• Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati-
cally via GPS, so it should not require any
time adjustment. If you do need to set the
time manually, follow the instructions be-
low for Model 4C NAV.
• For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then
press the time display at the top of the
screen. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press
the “Clock” button on the touchscreen,
then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out
of the Clock Setting screen.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable
from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d
like to set a theme, follow the instructions
below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen and select the display menu.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the
touchscreen and select a theme.
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA
306
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and
Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-
justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the auto-
matic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now
be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is
in PARK.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Main Menu
307
Radio
Uconnect 4C NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — HD Radio
6 — Main Category Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
308
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-
dio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and en-
tering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV) operates similar to conventional radio
except it allows broadcasters to transmit a
high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is
provided with a clear sound that enhances
the listening experience. HD radio can also
transmit data such as song title or artist.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone
and a number of its apps onto the touch-
screen radio display. Android Auto automati-
cally brings you useful information, and orga-
nizes it into simple cards that appear just
when they are needed. Android Auto can be
used with Google's best-in-class speech tech-
309
nology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the
radio display’s touchscreen to control many
of your apps. To use Android Auto follow
these steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-
powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in
your vehicle. If you have not downloaded
the Android Auto app to your smartphone
before plugging in the device for the first
time, the app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as af-
termarket cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the
use of the Android Auto app before use.
3. Once Android Auto has made a connec-
tion through USB, Android Auto will also
connect via Bluetooth. The system dis-
plays the Android Auto home screen.
Android Auto automatically launches, but
if it does not, refer to the Uconnect Own-
er’s Manual Supplement for the proce-
dure to enable the feature “AutoShow.”
You can also launch it by pressing Android
Auto located in the “Apps” menu. If you
use Android Auto frequently you can move
the app to the menu bar at the bottom of
the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button
and locate the Android Auto app; then
drag the selected App to replace an exist-
ing shortcut in the main menu bar.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your smartphone’s data
plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,
etc. for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu-
nication
• Hundred of compatible apps, and many
more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto
may use cellular data and your cellular cov-
erage is shown in the upper right corner of the
radio screen.
Android Auto
MULTIMEDIA
310
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down-
load app on Google Play. Android, Android
Auto and Google Play are trademarks of
Google Inc.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask
Google to take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon
in Android Auto to access Google Maps.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts
you and any spoken navigation command
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro-
vides voice-guided:
• Navigation
• Live traffic information
• Lane guidance
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect naviga-
tion system, and you try and start a new route
using Android Auto, via voice or any other
method, a pop-up appears asking if you
would like to switch from Uconnect naviga-
tion to smartphone navigation. A pop-up also
appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if
Android Auto is currently in use and you
attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route.
Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type
to the newly used method of navigation and a
route is planned for the new destination. If
“No” is selected the navigation type remains
unchanged.
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) or
https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canadian Residents).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to
https://support.google.com/android or
https://support.google.com/androidauto/.
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
Google Maps
311
Music
Android Auto allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream end-
less music on the road.
NOTE:
For music apps, playlists, and stations to
work with Android Auto, they must be set up
on your smartphone before using Android
Auto.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to
https://support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to acti-
vate voice recognition specific to the Android
Auto. This will allow you to send and reply to
text messages, have incoming text messages
read out loud, and place and receive hands-
free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto App will display all the
compatible apps that are available to use
with Android Auto, every time it is launched.
You must have the compatible app down-
loaded, and you must be signed in to the app
for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to
g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of avail-
able apps for Android Auto.
Android Auto Music
Android Auto Contact
Android Auto Phone
MULTIMEDIA
312
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car-
Play, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using
iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-
tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the
very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected, the system
displays the CarPlay home screen. Apple
CarPlay automatically launches, but if
not, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for the procedure to enable
the feature “AutoShow.” You can also
launch it by pressing the CarPlay icon
located in the “Apps” menu. If you use
Apple CarPlay frequently you can move
the app to the menu bar at the bottom of
the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button
and locate the CarPlay app; then drag and
drop the selected App to replace an exist-
ing shortcut in the main menu bar.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-
erage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
CarPlay
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
313
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Phone
With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. You can also press and
hold the Home button within CarPlay to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls
or listen to voice mail as you normally would
using Siri on your iPhone.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on
the steering wheel launches a built-in VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not
function with CarPlay.
Music
CarPlay allows you to access all your artists,
playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your
iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select
third party audio apps including music,
news, sports, podcasts and more.
Messages
Just like your iPhone, CarPlay allows you to
use Siri to send or reply to text messages.
Since everything is done by voice, Siri can
also read incoming text messages so you
don’t have to.
Maps
To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push
and hold the VR button on the steering wheel
to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a Nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a cat-
egory, by launching Siri from the destinations
page, or even by typing in a destination.
NOTE:
•
If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts
you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
Apple Music
Maps
MULTIMEDIA
314
• If you are using the built-in Uconnect navi-
gation system, and you try and start a new
route using CarPlay, via voice or any other
method, a pop-up appears asking if you
would like to switch from Uconnect naviga-
tion to iPhone navigation. A pop-up also
appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if
CarPlay navigation is currently in use and
you attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect
route. Selecting “Yes” switches the naviga-
tion type to the newly used method of
navigation and a route will be planned for
the new destination. If “No” is selected the
navigation type remains unchanged.
Apps
To use an app that is compatible with Car-
Play, you must have the compatible app al-
ready downloaded to your iPhone and you
must also be signed in. Refer to http://
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (U.S. Residents)
or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Ca-
nadian Residents) to see the latest list of
available apps for CarPlay.
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN —
IF EQUIPPED
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with
your hands on the steering wheel. You have
full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership
and driving experience. When connected to
an operable network, you can:
• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian
operator who can connect you to emergency
responders.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the Uconnect App from your device. You
can also do so by logging into your owner
site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care
when your vehicle has an operable network
connection. Services can only be used
where coverage is available.
• Receive text or email notifications if your
vehicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using
GPS technology to help authorities locate
your vehicle if it is stolen.
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST
button on your interior rearview mirror.
Navigation Pop-Up
315
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are
located on your rearview mirror. The AS-
SIST button is used for contacting Road-
side Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM
Guardian Care, and Uconnect Care. The
SOS Call button connects you to a
SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who can
connect you to emergency services.
2. The Uconnect “Apps
” button is lo-
cated in the center of the menu bar of the
radio touchscreen. This is where you can
manage your Apps.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and
Uconnect Phone buttons are located on
the left side of your steering wheel. These
buttons let you use your voice to give
commands, make phone calls, send and
receive text messages, enter navigation
destinations, and control your radio and
media devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian
services starting at the date of vehicle pur-
chase (date based on vehicle sales notifica-
tion from your dealer). To activate the trial, you
must first register with SiriusXM Guardian. Af-
ter the trial period, if you wish to continue
your SiriusXM Guardian services you can
choose to purchase a subscription.
NOTE:
You can check UconnectPhone.com for sys-
tem and device compatibility.
SiriusXM Guardian Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from
your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a
button press away with Assist.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from
hundreds of miles away.
• Find your vehicle, no matter where you
parked, using the convenient Vehicle
Finder function.
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route
from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s
navigation system.
For further information:.
• U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/guardian
• Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian
MULTIMEDIA
316
Download The Uconnect App
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and other valuable ser-
vices.
To use the Uconnect App:
• Search for and download the Uconnect App
from the store on your compatible iPhone or
Android powered device.
• Log in to the app using the email address
and password you created when you acti-
vated the services.
• Press the “Remote” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Re-
mote Start (if equipped), and activate your
horn and lights remotely.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your vehicle’s navigation system.
• Press the menu button (three horizontal
lines) in the upper left corner of the app to
access settings and support information.
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display)
Subscriptions can be purchased online by
logging into your owner account. If you need
help push the ASSIST button on the rearview
mirror, then select SiriusXM Guardian Care
or:
• U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend
that you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Ac-
count information from the vehicle. You can
do this by pressing the ASSIST button in your
vehicle and selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or
call:
• U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Mobile App
317
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. Some features are lim-
ited while the vehicle is in motion. Some
services, including SOS, will NOT work
without a subscription and an operable
network connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could
mean you may not have SOS Call service
if needed. If the rearview mirror light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immedi-
ately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light on the instrument panel if a mal-
function is detected in any part of the
airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, the air bag system
may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not send a signal
to a SOS Call operator if an air bag is
deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in
danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location),
do not wait for voice contact from a SOS
Call operator. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into
the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not
add aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a sig-
nal to initiate an emergency call. To
avoid interference that can cause the
SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to
your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD-
ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), the Uconnect features, apps,
and SiriusXM Guardian services, among
others, will not operate.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped —
The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST
button, allowing you to speak to a call
center agent for support:
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a
flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help any-
time. Additional fees may apply. Addi-
tional information in this section.
Assist And SOS
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
MULTIMEDIA
318
• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for
Uconnect Apps and Features.
• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
NOTE:
In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Ser-
vices to you, we may record and monitor your
conversations with Roadside Assistance,
Uconnect Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or
Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are
initiated through the SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices in your vehicle, your device, or via a
landline device, and may share information
obtained through such recording and moni-
toring in accordance with regulatory require-
ments. You acknowledge, agree, and consent
to any recording, monitoring or sharing of
information obtained through any such call
recordings.
2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The
rearview mirror contains a SOS Call but-
ton that, when pressed, may place a call
from your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian
Care operator, who can connect you to
emergency service operators, to request
help from local police, fire or ambulance
personnel. If this button is accidentally
pressed, you will have ten seconds to stop
the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call
button again or press the “Cancel” button
shown on the touchscreen. After ten sec-
onds has passed, the SOS call will be
placed and only the SOS Call operator can
cancel it. The LED light on the rearview
mirror will turn green once a connection to
a SOS Call operator has been made. The
green LED light will turn off once the SOS
Call is terminated. Have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle if the rearview
mirror light is continuously red. On
equipped vehicles, this feature requires a
functioning electrical system, a subscrip-
tion, and an operable network connection.
If a connection is made between a SOS Call
operator and your vehicle, you understand
and agree that SOS Call operators will stay
on the line, even after you connect with
emergency services. The Emergency ser-
vices operator may, like any other emer-
gency call, record conversations and
sounds in and near your vehicle upon
connection.
3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped —
The Theft Alarm Notification feature noti-
fies you via email or text (SMS) message
when the vehicle’s factory-installed secu-
rity alarm system has been triggered.
There are a number of reasons why your
alarm may have been triggered, one of
which could be that your vehicle was sto-
len. If so, please see the details of the
Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below.
When activated, Theft Alarm Notification
is automatically set to send you an email
at the email address you provide should
the alarm go off. You may also opt to have
a text message sent to your device.
319
4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle
is stolen, contact local law enforcement
immediately to file a stolen vehicle report.
Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM
Guardian Care can help locate your ve-
hicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent
will ask for the stolen vehicle report num-
ber issued by local law enforcement. As
long as your vehicle has a SiriusXM
Guardian subscription and an operable
network connection, the agent may be
able to locate the stolen vehicle and work
with law enforcement to help recover it.
Your vehicle must have an operable net-
work connection and must be registered
with SiriusXM Guardian with an active
subscription that includes the applicable
feature.
5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows
you and your passengers to connect their
portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi
capabilities of your Uconnect system.
Purchasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the
use of an Internet-enabled portable
device.
NOTE:
Uconnect offers a complimentary
3–month trial period that includes 1GB of
total data. The trial can be activated any
time within the first year of new vehicle
ownership.
a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box
should be un-checked.
b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option
from the toushcreeen to locate your
Hotspot Name and Password. Make
note of this information.
c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the
main Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check
the box to Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot.
d. From your portable device Wi-Fi set-
tings menu, select the Hotspot Name
from the list of available networks and
enter the provided Password.
e. Open the web browser on your por-
table device and enter the following
web address:
https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login.
f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to
your existing one.
g. Select and purchase the desired sub-
scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot
will activate after a few minutes.
For additional assistance, call AT&T Cus-
tomer Care at: 866-595-1330.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM
Guardian services to operate.
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android
powered device, the Uconnect App allows
you to remotely lock or unlock your doors,
start your engine or activate your horn and
lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle
must be equipped with remote start, must
have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and
must have an operable network connection.
Services can only be used where coverage is
available. You can download the App from
Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store
(iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit
UconnectPhone.com to determine if your de-
vice is compatible.
MULTIMEDIA
320
For Uconnect Phone customer support and to
determine if your device is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents - visit
UconnectPhone.com or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or
call:1-800-387-9983 (French).
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature
provides the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually
any distance. You can send a request to your
vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not en-
tered your vehicle with the key, the
engine will shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-
off an engine that has been remote
started.
• This remote function requires your ve-
hicle to be equipped with a factory-
installed Remote Start system. To uti-
lize this feature after the Uconnect App
is downloaded, login with your user
name and password.
You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guard-
ian Security PIN to confirm the request.
Press the “remote start” icon on your
Uconnect App to remotely start the vehicle.
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM
Guardian Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped —
This feature provides the ability to lock or
unlock the door on your vehicle, without the
keys and from virtually any distance. You can
send a request to your vehicle in one of three
ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on
the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm
the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on
your Uconnect App to lock the doors, and
press the “open lock” icon to unlock the
driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM
Guardian Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’s
easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason. You
can send a request to your vehicle in one of
three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
321
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care
on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm
the request. You can set-up notifications for
your account to receive an email or text
(SMS) message every time a command is
sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at
mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to man-
age SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Vehicle Finder
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to find the location of
your vehicle when you can't remember where
it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and
flash the lights to make finding your vehicle
even easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine
the location of your vehicle.
3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap-
pears, once your vehicle is located.
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to
route a path to your vehicle.
Send & Go
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to search for a desti-
nation on your mobile device and then send
the route to your vehicle’s Uconnect Naviga-
tion system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Either type in the destination you would
like to navigate to, or search through one
of the categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to
from the list that appears.
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and
then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the
Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your ve-
hicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on
the pop-up that appears on the touch-
screen, when the vehicle is started.
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The steering wheel audio controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
MULTIMEDIA
322
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset radio station.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/SXM.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be interfered
with by the presence of mountains, buildings
or bridges, especially when you are far away
from the broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving
traffic alerts and news.
Care And Maintenance
Observe the following precautions to ensure
the system is fully operational:
• The display lens should not come into con-
tact with pointed or rigid objects which
could damage its surface; use a soft, dry
anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to
clean the display lens.
• Prevent any liquid from entering the sys-
tem: this could damage it beyond repair.
Anti-Theft Protection
The system is equipped with an anti-theft
protection system based on the exchange of
information with the electronic control unit
(Body Computer) on the vehicle.
This guarantees maximum safety and pre-
vents the secret code from being entered
after the power supply has been discon-
nected.
If the check has a positive outcome, the
system will start to operate, whereas if the
comparison codes are not the same or if the
electronic control unit (Body Computer) is
replaced, the system will ask the user to enter
the secret code. See an authorized dealer for
further information.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system allows you to access
Customer Programmable feature settings
such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driv-
ing Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off
Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, Suspension, SiriusXM Setup, Re-
store Settings, Clear Personal Data, and Sys-
tem Information through buttons on the
touchscreen.
Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 4), or
press the “Apps” button (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV) located near the bottom of the touch-
screen, then press the “Settings” button on
the touchscreen to access the Settings
screen. When making a selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is high-
lighted, then press the preferred setting until
a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. The
following feature settings are available:
• Display • Engine Off Options
• Units • Camera
• Voice • Suspension
323
• Clock • Audio
• Safety & Driving
Assistance
• Phone/Bluetooth
• Mirrors & Wipers • Accessibility
• Lights • SiriusXM Setup
• Doors & Locks • Restore Settings
• Auto-On Comfort
& Remote Start
• Clear Personal Data
• Compass –
If Equipped
• System Information
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER
CONTROL
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players, or USB devices through your
vehicle's sound system. Press your Media
button on the touchscreen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged into
the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound
system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touch-
screen will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the audio jack is connected, allow-
ing the music from your device to be heard
through the vehicle's speakers. To activate
the AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled
using the device buttons. The volume may
be controlled using the radio or device.
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device into the
USB Port using a USB cable. USB Memory
sticks with audio files can also be used.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — USB Port One
2 — Audio/AUX Jack
3 — USB Port Two
MULTIMEDIA
324
Audio from the device can be played on the
vehicle’s sound system while providing
metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
information on the radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB de-
vice can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip
to the next or previous track, browse, and
list the contents.
•
The battery charges when plugged into the
USB port (if supported by the specific device).
• To route the USB cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first
time, the system may take several minutes to
read your music, depending on the number of
files. For example, the system will take ap-
proximately five minutes for every
1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also dur-
ing the reading process, the Shuffle and
Browse functions will be disabled. This pro-
cess is needed to ensure the full use of your
features and only happens the first time it is
connected.
After the first time, the reading process of
your device will take considerably less time
unless changes are made or new songs are
added to the playlist.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
If using a Bluetooth equipped device you may
also be able to stream music to your vehicle's
sound system. Your connected device must
be Bluetooth compatible and paired with your
system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing in-
structions). You can access the music from
your connected Bluetooth device by pressing
the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen
while in Media mode.
UCONNECT REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is de-
signed to give your family years of enjoyment.
You can play your favorite CDs, DVDs or
Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over the wire-
less headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices.
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats:
Open the LCD screen cover by lifting up on
cover.
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC posi-
tion.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-
ray Disc Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray
disc player, the icon will be present on the
Player.
RSE System Screen
325
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment sys-
tem by pushing the power button on the
remote control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a
DVD/Blu-ray disc is inserted into the disc
player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automati-
cally, the headphone transmitters turn on
and playback begins.
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Chan-
nel 1 (Rear 1) on the remote control and
headphones, refers to Screen 1 (driver's
side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Re-
mote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 2 (passenger side).
• The system can be controlled either by the
front seat occupants utilizing the touch-
screen radio or by the rear seat occupants
using the remote control.
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
RSE System Remote Control Channel
Selectors
RSE System Headphone Channel
Selectors
MULTIMEDIA
326
Dual Video Screen
NOTE:
Typically there are two different ways to op-
erate the features of the Rear Seat Entertain-
ment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray disc player is located in the
center console.
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc
player with the label facing as indicated
on the Blu-ray player. The radio automati-
cally selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and displays the
menu screen, the language screen, or
starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for
driver's side rear passengers, ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for
passenger side rear passengers, ensure
the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press
the “Media” button on the touchscreen,
and then press the “Disc” button. Press the
“Play” button, and then the “full screen”
button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces. The
vehicle must be stopped, and the gear se-
lector must be in the PARK position for
vehicles with automatic transmission.
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
327
Using The Touchscreen Radio
Rear Media Control Screen
MULTIMEDIA
328
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
1/Channel 1. This button will be high-
lighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front
user. If this button is not highlighted,
select button to access controls for
Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current
ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will
unmute rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable remote control
functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
2/Channel 2. This button will be high-
lighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front
user. If this button is not highlighted,
select button to access controls for
Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
6. Cabin Audio Mode
Select this button to change the cabin
audio to the rear entertainment source
currently shown on the rear media control
screen.
7. Radio Full Screen Mode
Select this button to change to Full
Screen Mode.
8. RSE Mode
Select this button to change source for
the active (highlighted) rear Screen/
Channel on the rear media control screen.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen,
and then press the rear media button on the
touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to
begin playing the Blu-ray disc on the touch-
screen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s
side rear screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s
side rear screen), and then press the source
key, and using the up and down arrows,
highlight disc from the menu and press the
OK button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the
disc menu and options.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/
Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the
side of each seat.
329
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI
Jacks) on the side of each seat enable the
monitor to display video directly from a video
camera, connect video games for display on
the screen, or play music directly from an
MP3 player.
When connecting an external source to the
AUX/HDMI input, ensure to follow the stan-
dard color coding for the audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power
Inverter.
Accessibility — If Equipped
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray
system that announces a function prior to
performing the action. For further informa-
tion refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” in your Owner’s Manual.
NAVIGATION —
IF EQUIPPED
• The information in the section below is only
applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C
NAV With 8.4–inch Display system.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in
the menu bar to access the Navigation system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen in the lower right area of the
screen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guid-
ance” button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav
Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
MULTIMEDIA
330
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories
2 — Find A Destination
3 — View Map
4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination
5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination
6 — Navigation Settings
7 — Emergency
8 — Information
331
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button
on the touchscreen.
• Select a category and then a subcategory, if
necessary.
• Select your destination and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the
touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”
or “Search All” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” or “OK” button on the
touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without tak-
ing your hands off the wheel.
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "Find
Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills
MI."
NOTE:
Using your touchscreens keyboard is not
available while your vehicle is in motion.
However, you can also use Voice Commands
to enter an address while moving. Refer to
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips” in
this section for further information.
Setting Your Home Location
• To add a Home location, press the “Nav”
button on the touchscreen in the menu bar
to access the Navigation system and the
Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Home” button on the touch-
screen. You can add a Home location by
either selecting “Spell City,” “Spell
Street,” or “Select Country.” Select County
is automatically filled out based on your
state.
• Once you have entered your Home location,
select the “Save Home” button located on
the lower left-hand side of your touch-
screen.
• To delete a saved Home location (or other
saved locations), so you can save a new
Home location, press the “Nav” button on
the touchscreen, and in the “Where To”
screen, press “Edit Where To” and then
press the “Home” button on the touch-
screen. Under the Manage screen press the
“Reset Location” button. A confirmation
screen will appear asking if you “Are you
sure you want to reset this location?” Press
“Reset” to confirm the deletion. Set a new
Home location by following the previous
instructions.
MULTIMEDIA
332
Home
•
A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu, press the “Home” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Your Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
333
Your route is marked with a blue line on the
map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon
could appear as you travel on major road-
ways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touch-
screen to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected,
you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as
the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the
only reasonable option, the device may not
calculate a detour. For more information, see
your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Traffic Plus
(4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By
enhancing your vehicle's navigation system
with the ability to see detailed traffic infor-
mation, you can pinpoint traffic incidents,
determine average traffic speed and estimate
travel time along your route. Since the service
is integrated with a vehicle's navigation sys-
tem, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers
pick the fastest route based on traffic condi-
tions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, acci-
dents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources,
including police and emergency services,
cameras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic informa-
tion.
• View conditions for points along your route
and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link
(4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of
the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre-
mium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems.
SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful
information into your vehicle and right to your
fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel
prices in your area and route to the station
of your choice.
MULTIMEDIA
334
• Movie Listings — Check local movie the-
atres and listings in your area and route to
the theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores
as well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check variety of local and na-
tional weather information from radar maps
to current and 5-day forecast.
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely
integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes
after you start your vehicle, Travel Link infor-
mation arrives and updates in the back-
ground. You can access the information
whenever you like, with no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, then press the
“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch-
screen.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription,
sold separately after the trial subscription
included with your vehicle purchase.
335
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
*—
Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones
(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
MULTIMEDIA
336
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone Menu
1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Do Not Disturb
4 — Reply with Text Message
5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name
6 — Conference Call*
7 — Phone Pairing
8 — Text Messaging Menu**
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Contact Menu
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Favorite Contacts
13 — Mute Microphone
14 — Decline Incoming Call
15 — Answer/Redial/Hold
16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
*—
Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones
(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
337
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone
calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command sec-
tion).
The hands-free calling feature is made pos-
sible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different elec-
tronic devices to connect to each other wire-
lessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compat-
ible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be
equipped with all of the required features
to utilize all of the Uconnect system
features.
For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-877-855-8400.
• Canadian residents visit
UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French).
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab-
lishing a wireless connection between a cel-
lular phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you
first must determine if your mobile phone
and software are compatible with the
Uconnect system. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be
paired to the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 4:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 4
MULTIMEDIA
338
Uconnect 4C, 4C NAV:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen.
3. Select “Pairing.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Pair Your iPhone:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth
connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
1. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
339
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mo-
bile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automati-
cally when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile
phone to download the phonebook,
check “Do Not Ask Again” to automati-
cally download the phonebook. This is
so you can make calls by saying the
name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
MULTIMEDIA
340
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile
phone matches the passkey shown on the
Uconnect system then accept the
Bluetooth pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mo-
bile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automati-
cally when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
NOTE:
Software updates, either on your phone or
Uconnect system, may interfere with the
Bluetooth connection. If this happens, sim-
ply repeat the pairing process. However, first,
make sure to delete the device from the list of
phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be
sure to remove Uconnect from the list of
devices in your phone’s Bluetooth settings.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls.
Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for ad-
ditional information on mobile phone pairing
and for a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During
Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on
the Phone main screen to mute and unmute
the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Trans-
fer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset
and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync
your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone.
Phonebook contacts are updated each time
that the phone is connected. If your phone
book entries do not appear, check the set-
tings on your phone. Some phones require
you to enable this feature manually.
341
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the
Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing
can only be done on your phone. To browse,
press the “Phone” button on the touch-
screen, then the “Phonebook” button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as
Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown at the top of the main phone screen.
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John
Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater
system accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for
faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”
for example.
• If you are listening to available voice com-
mand options, you do not have to listen to
the entire list. When you hear the command
that you need, push the
button on the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say
your command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button
, then say a command. For example,
"Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME rotary knob to ad-
just the volume to a comfortable level while
the Uconnect system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different
than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect VR button
(if active) on the steering wheel and say
"help." Push the Uconnect VR Pickup button
(if active) or the VR button (if
active) and say "cancel" to cancel the help
session.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allow-
ing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of
your missed calls and text messages while
you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only avail-
able on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
MULTIMEDIA
342
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect
system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s
audio system.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the
mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
• A pop up will appear asking you to
accept a request for permission to con-
nect to your messages. Select “Don’t
ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted from
the Uconnect system when the ignition is
turned to the OFF position.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
Enable Android Device Incoming
Text Messages
343
Helpful Tips And Common Questions
To Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after
pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or
trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth
settings (Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile
phone. Refer to your mobile phone manu-
facturer or cellular provider for instruc-
tions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically
reconnect after being restarted (hard re-
boot). Your mobile phone can still be con-
nected manually. Close all applications
that may be operating (refer to mobile
phone manufacturer’s instructions), and
follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting)
Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect
System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by
removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual).
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the
discovered Bluetooth devices on your mo-
bile phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code
the default is 0000.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four num-
bers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system phonebook.
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) car-
riers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual
for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-
Free Calling. Do not make calls while your
mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know
to control your Uconnect 4, or Uconnect
4C/4C NAV system.
MULTIMEDIA
344
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know
to control your Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or
in the Apps menus, of your 8.4-inch touch-
screen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV sys-
tem. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with
8.4-inch display system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steer-
ing wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mo-
bile device and feature compatibility and
to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and pas-
senger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and vol-
ume while facing straight ahead. The mi-
crophone is positioned on the rearview
mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recogni-
tion (VR) or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Com-
mand from the current category.
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer
A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin
Radio, Media, or Climate Functions.
For 8.4–inch System Only: Push To
Begin Navigation Function
3 — Push To End Call
345
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be
given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
•“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
•“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
•“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues ap-
pear on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep,
say:
•“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
•“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The
system provides you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for con-
nected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist.
•“Change source to Bluetooth”
•“Change source to AUX”
•“Change source to USB”
•“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Great-
est Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”;
“Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch-
screen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA
346
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone
calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone-
book button is illuminated on your touch-
screen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone com-
patibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
•“Call John Smith”
•“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
•“Redial (call previous outgoing phone num-
ber)”
•“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button
and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has mul-
tiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John
Smith work.”
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
347
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text mes-
sages. Push the Phone button
and say
“Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined mes-
sages and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start
without me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where
are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you
there yet?
I’ll call
you later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number>
of minutes.
I’m on
my way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access Pro-
file (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. To enable this
feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these
four simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired
Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
MULTIMEDIA
348
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle tempera-
tures hands-free and keep everyone comfort-
able while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle
is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•“Set the passenger temperature to 70
degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you
save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you
want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills,
Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR but-
ton
. After the beep, say: “Find nearest
coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Climate
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-Inch
Display Climate
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
349
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)—
If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, includ-
ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call
will NOT work without an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
connection compatible with your device.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is re-
quired to take advantage of the SiriusXM
Guardian services in the next section of this
guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect
4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the con-
tinental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and
Canada. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for
details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from
your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
• U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if
you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian.
Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key
systems that need your attention. For further
information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA
350
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and sending a destination
from your phone to your vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your SiriusXM
Guardian services, download the Uconnect
App to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the
app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Re-
mote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn
and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the up-
per left corner of the app to bring up app
settings.
NOTE:
For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie
listings, check a sports score or the5-day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a
suite of services that brings a wealth of infor-
mation right to your Uconnect 4C NAV sys-
tem. (Not available for Uconnect 4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Show fuel prices”
•“Show 5 - day weather forecast”
•“Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with
Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural lan-
guage to understand what you mean and
responds back to confirm your requests.
Mobile App
SiriusXM Travel Link
351
The system is designed to keep your eyes on
the road and your hands on the wheel by
letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release
the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button
on the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages
and many other useful requests.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allow-
ing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of
your missed calls and text messages while
you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on
the touchscreen while typing a custom
message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only avail-
able on phones that support Bluetooth
MAP.
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri
Eyes Free Available
MULTIMEDIA
352
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice rec-
ognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto
your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your
Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto icon that replaces your “Phone”
icon on the main menu bar to begin Android
Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Micro-
phone” icon within Android Auto, to activate
Android’s VR, which recognizes natural voice
commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s
features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down-
load app on Google Play. Android, Android
Auto, and Google Play are trademarks of
Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your iPhone and
a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using
the factory-provided Lightning cable, and
press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
353
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to ac-
tivate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s
features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
MULTIMEDIA
354
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.
Mopar and Uconnect are registered trade-
marks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trade-
mark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark
of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day
7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit
www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or call:
1-877-324-9091
355
356
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .358
FCA US LLC Customer Center ......358
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .358
In Mexico Contact ..............358
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .358
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ......359
Service Contract ...............359
WARRANTY INFORMATION . . .360
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS .................360
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. ..............360
In Canada...................360
PUBLICATION
ORDER FORMS .............361
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
357
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an autho-
rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer's autho-
rized dealer have the facilities, factory-
trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number
(home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
358
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing diffi-
culties, the manufacturer has installed spe-
cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional tele-
typewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dial-
ing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties
that require assistance can use the special
needs relay service offered by Bell Canada.
For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con-
nect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract
for a vehicle to help protect you from the high
cost of unexpected repairs after the manufac-
turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
The manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur-
chased a manufacturer's service contract,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Ca-
nadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng-
lish / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufactur-
er's service contract. It is not responsible for
any service contract other than the manufac-
turer's service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer's
service contract, and you require service after
the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve
any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion en-
gines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
359
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the
terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran-
ties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should im-
mediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in in-
dividual problems between you, an au-
thorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Av-
enue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety defect to the Cana-
dian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle De-
fect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
360
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
Warranty Booklet. United States customers
may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at
www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove
Compartment Material” from the left menu.
You can also purchase a copy by calling
1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you
prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio
Manuals may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling
1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master
Card, American Express and Discover or-
ders are accepted.
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec-
tronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT
websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select
“Owner/Service Manuals”. Then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the
drop down lists.
361
362
Accessories..................291
Mopar ...................291
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)..............170
Off .................170, 172
On..................170, 172
Adding Fuel ..............181, 183
Additives, Fuel................283
AirBag ....................114
Air Bag Operation ............115
Air Bag Warning Light .........112
Driver Knee Air Bag ...........115
Enhanced Accident Response .120, 226
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ......227
Front Air Bag ...............114
If Deployment Occurs .........119
Knee Impact Bolsters .........115
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .120
Maintenance ...............120
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .113
Side Air Bags ..............116
Transporting Pets ............135
Air Bag Light...........69, 112, 136
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......249
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........249
Air Conditioner System...........249
Air Conditioning ................46
Air Conditioning Filter.........48, 249
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ......47
Air Pressure
Tires ....................266
Alarm
Arm The System ...........19, 20
Disarm The System ............20
Rearm The System ............20
Security Alarm ............19, 72
Android Auto ..........303, 309, 353
Apps ....................312
Communication .............312
Maps ...................311
Music ...................312
Antifreeze
(Engine
Coolant) ........285
Capacities ................286
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......82
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...........72
Apple CarPlay .........304, 313, 353
Apps ....................315
Maps ...................314
Messages .................314
Music ...................314
Phone ...................314
Assist, Hill Start................84
Audio Jack ..................324
Auto Down Power Windows .........48
Automatic Door Locks ............23
Automatic High Beams ...........34
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .46
Automatic Transmission.......141, 151
Adding Fluid ...........288, 289
Fluid Level Check ............256
Fluid Type .........288, 289, 291
Auto Up Power Windows...........49
Axle Fluid...................291
Axle Lubrication ...........288, 289
Back-Up ...................180
Back-Up Camera ..............180
Battery ..................70, 248
Charging System Light ..........70
Belts, Seat ..................136
Blind Spot Monitoring ............93
B-Pillar Location ..............261
Brake Assist System .............83
Brake Control System, Electronic .....83
Brake Fluid .......256, 288, 289, 291
INDEX
363
Brake System ................255
Fluid Check ........256, 288, 289
Master Cylinder .............256
Warning Light ...............69
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......150
Break-In Recommendations,
New Vehicle ............144, 145
Bulb Replacement .............202
Bulbs, Light .................138
Camera ....................180
Capacities, Antifreeze
(Engine Coolant) .............286
Capacities, Fluid ...........285, 286
Caps, Filler
Fuel ....................220
Oil (Engine) ...............242
Carbon Monoxide Warning .........135
Chains, Tire ..............273, 274
Changing A Flat Tire ............257
Chart, Tire Sizing ..............258
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) ..............79
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .135
Checks, Safety ................135
Child Restraint................122
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..............124
Child Seat Installation .........132
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat
Belt ....................130
Infant And Child Restraints ......123
LATCH Positions ............126
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children ..................126
Older Children And Child Restraints .124
Seating Positions ............125
Child Safety Locks ..............24
Cleaning
Wheels ..................272
Climate Control ................39
Automatic .................39
Compact Spare Tire .............271
Computer, Trip/Travel .............68
Contract, Service ..............359
Cooling
System ..............
.255
Coolant Capacity .........285, 286
Inspection ................255
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) .....285, 287, 289, 290
Cruise Light................76, 78
Customer Assistance ............358
Customer Programmable Features . . . .323
Cybersecurity.................295
Daytime Running Lights ...........34
Dealer Service ................248
Defroster, Windshield............136
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........78
Diesel Fuel ..................283
Diesel Fuel Requirements .........283
Bulk Storage Of .............185
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...............247
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..........224
Disturb ....................342
Do Not Disturb................352
Door Ajar .................70, 71
Door Ajar Light ..............70, 71
Door Locks, Automatic ............23
Drag And Drop Menu ........301, 307
DVD Player (Video
Entertainment System) .........325
Economy (Fuel) Mode ...........150
Electric Brake Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System .........82
Electronic Roll Mitigation .....85, 88
Electronic Brake Control System ......83
INDEX
364
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control) ..........167, 168
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....85
Electronic Throttle Control
Warning Light ...............70
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .....223
Hazard Warning Flasher ........202
Jacking ..................257
Jump Starting ..............218
Tow Hooks ................226
Emission Control System Maintenance . .79
Engine ..........242, 244, 245, 246
Break-In Recommendations . .144, 145
Checking Oil Level ...........247
Compartment .242, 243, 244, 245, 246
Compartment Identification . .242, 243
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .287, 289, 290
Cooling ..................255
Exhaust Gas Caution ..........135
Fuel Requirements ...........282
Identification ..............246
Jump Starting ..............218
Oil...........285, 287, 289, 290
Oil Filler Cap ...............242
Oil Reset ..................65
Oil Selection ...............285
Overheating ...............221
Starting ..................141
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ...............120, 226
Exhaust Gas Cautions ...........135
Exhaust System ...............135
Exterior Lights ................138
Filters
Air Conditioning ..........48, 249
Engine Oil .........287, 289, 290
Flashers ....................202
Hazard Warning .............202
Turn Signal ................205
Turn Signals .............77, 138
Fluid, Brake ..........288, 289, 291
Fluid Capacities ...........285, 286
Fluid
Leaks .................
.138
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ...................256
Fluids And Lubricants . . . .287, 289, 290
Forward Collision Warning ..........95
Four-Way Hazard Flasher..........202
Four Wheel Drive ...........153, 162
Operation .................153
Systems ..................153
Four Wheel Drive Operation ........153
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..........223
Front And Rear ParkSense System . . . .177
Fuel ...................282, 283
Adding ...............181, 183
Additives .................283
Diesel ................283, 290
Economy Mode .............150
Gasoline .................282
Light ....................73
Materials Added .............283
Octane Rating .......282, 287, 289
Requirements ...........282, 283
Specifications .......284, 287, 289
Tank Capacity ...........285, 286
Fueling .................181, 183
Fuses .....................207
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ......56
Gasoline (Fuel)................282
General Information.............322
Glass Cleaning ................278
Hands-Free Phone
Uconnect .................336
Hazard Warning Flasher ..........202
Headlights
On With Wipers ..............35
Passing ...................35
365
Head Restraints ................27
Heated Mirrors.................33
Heated Steering Wheel............30
Hill Descent Control .............90
Hill Descent Control Indicator .......90
Hill Start Assist ................84
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)......56
Hood Release .................52
Ignition .....................16
Switch ...................16
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................77
Display ...................64
Engine Oil Reset .............65
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .....277
Interior Appearance Care .........276
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ....37
Introduction ...................1
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ............13
Inverter Outlet (115V) ............62
Inverter, Power ................62
Jacking Instructions ............214
Jack Location .............212, 213
Jack Operation ............214, 257
Jump Starting ................218
Key Fob
Arm The System .............19
Disarm The System ............20
Programming Additional
Key Fobs ...............15, 18
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)..........15
Key-In Reminder ...............17
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..............20
Keys .......................14
Replacement .............15, 19
Lane Change Assist..............36
LaneSense ..................179
Lap/Shoulder Belts .............104
Latches ....................138
Lead Free Gasoline .............282
Leaks, Fluid .................138
Life Of Tires .................268
Liftgate ..................53, 54
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......39
Light Bulbs ..................138
Lights .....................138
A
i
rBag ............69, 112, 136
Brake Assist Warning ...........88
Brake Warning ...............69
Bulb Replacement ...........202
Cruise .................76, 78
Daytime Running .............34
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .......33
Engine Temperature Warning ......70
Exterior ..................138
Hazard Warning Flasher ........202
Headlights On With Wipers .......35
Hill Descent Control Indicator .....90
Low Fuel ..................73
Malfunction Indicator
(Check Engine) ..............73
Park .....................76
Passing ...................35
Seat Belt Reminder ...........71
Security Alarm ..............72
Service ..................202
Side Marker ...............205
Traction Control ..............88
Turn Signal .............33, 205
Turn Signals ............77, 138
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .............70, 77
Loading Vehicle
Tires ....................261
Locks
Automatic Door ..............23
Child Protection ..............24
INDEX
366
Lug Nuts ...................281
Maintenance Free Battery .........248
Maintenance Schedule . . . .230, 233, 238
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ............73, 79
Manual, Service ...............361
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection ...........291
Marker Lights, Side .............205
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ......24
Memory Seat..................24
Memory Seats And Radio ..........24
Mini-Trip Computer ..............68
Mirrors .....................32
Exterior Folding ..............32
Heated ...................33
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......97
Mopar Accessories .............291
Multi-Function Control Lever ........33
Navigation ..................330
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . .144, 145
Occupant Restraints ............102
Octane Rating,
Gasoline (Fuel) .......282, 287, 289
Oil, Engine ...........287, 289, 290
Capacity ..............285, 286
Checking .................247
Dipstick ..................247
Filter .............287, 289, 290
Pressure Warning Light .........71
Recommendation ............285
Viscosity .................285
Oil Pressure Light ...............71
Oil Reset ....................65
Onboard Diagnostic System .........78
Operating Precautions ............78
Outlet
Power ....................59
Overheating, Engine ............221
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .361
Paddle Shifters ...............151
ParkSense
Front And Rear .............177
ParkSense Active Park Assist .......178
ParkSense
System ............
.177
ParkSense System, Rear ..........175
Passing Light .................35
Personalized Main Menu ......301, 307
Pets ......................135
Phone
Pairing ..................338
Phonebook ..................341
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) ......336
Phone (Uconnect) ..............336
Pinch Protection ...............51
Placard, Tire And Loading
Information ................261
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ......208
Glass Sunroof ...............50
Inverter ...................62
Lift Gate ..................54
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .59
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . .31
Windows ..................48
Power Shade
Open ....................52
Power Steering Fluid ............291
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .....108
Preparation For Jacking ..........213
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................108
Quadra-Lift ..................158
Quadra-Trac ..............153, 154
367
Radial Ply Tires ...............267
Radio
Presets ...............302, 308
Radio Frequency
General Information ......15, 18, 19
Radio Operation ...........300, 306
Radio Screens ............300, 306
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........38
Rear Camera .................180
Rear Cross Path ................93
Rear ParkSense System .......175, 180
Rear Wiper/Washer ..............39
Recreational Towing ............195
Reminder, Seat Belt ............103
Remote Control
Starting System ..............18
Remote Keyless Entry ............14
Arm The Alarm ..............19
Disarm The Alarm ............20
Programming Additional
Key Fobs ...............15, 18
Remote Starting System ...........18
Replacement Bulbs .............202
Replacement Keys............15, 19
Replacement Tires .............268
Reporting Safety Defects .........360
Restraint, Head ................27
Restraints, Child ..............122
Roll Over Warning ...............2
Rotation, Tires ................274
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......136
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......137
Safety Defects, Reporting .........360
Safety, Exhaust Gas.............135
Safety Information, Tire ..........257
Safety Tips ..................135
Schedule, Maintenance . . .230, 233, 238
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ................107
Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) ...................109
Seat Belt Maintenance ...........277
Seat Belt Reminder..............71
Seat Belts ...............103,
136
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......107
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage ................107
Child Restraints .............122
Energy Management Feature .....109
Extender .................108
Front Seat .........103, 104, 106
Inspection ................136
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .....106
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...........104
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....106
Operating Instructions .........106
Pregnant Women ............108
Pretensioners ..............108
Rear Seat .................104
Reminder .................103
Seat Belt Extender ...........108
Seat Belt Pretensioner .........108
Untwisting Procedure .........106
Seats .................24, 25, 26
Heated .................25, 26
Memory ...................24
Vented ...................26
Ventilated .................26
Security Alarm ..............19, 72
Arm The System .............19
Disarm The System ............20
Selec-Terrain .................162
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) .........287, 289, 290
Sentry Key
Key Programming .............18
Sentry Key Replacement ........15, 19
Service Assistance .............358
Service Contract ...............359
INDEX
368
Service Manuals ...............361
Shifting ....................148
Automatic Transmission .....148, 151
Shoulder Belts ................104
Signals, Turn ...........77, 138, 205
Siri .......................351
Sirius Satellite Radio
Traffic & Weather ............334
Sirius Travel Link ..............334
SiriusXM Guardian .............315
Account ..................315
App ....................317
In Vehicle Features ...........317
Maintaining Your Account .......317
Registration ...............316
Remote Features ............320
Renewing Subscriptions ........317
Send&Go ................322
Vehicle Finder ..............322
Vehicle Health Alert ..........350
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .....273, 274
Snow Tires ..................270
Spare Tires ...........270, 271, 272
Spark Plugs ..............287, 289
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........287, 289
Oil..................287, 289
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............168, 169
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ........171
Cancel ...................169
Distance Setting (ACC Only) .....173
Mode Setting (ACC Only) .......173
Resume ..................169
Set.....................168
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . .167, 168
Starting ..............18, 141, 143
Automatic Transmission ........143
Button ...................
1
6
Remote ...................18
Starting And Operating ...........141
Starting Procedures .........141, 143
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) . .143
Steering
Tilt Column ..............30, 31
Wheel, Heated ...............30
Wheel, Tilt ..............30, 31
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..................322
Storage, Vehicle ................47
Sunroof
Closing ...................50
Opening ...................50
Venting ...................50
Sun Roof ....................50
Supplemental Restraint System -
AirBag...................114
Sway Control, Trailer .............89
System, Remote Starting ..........18
Telescoping Steering Column .....30, 31
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .46
Text Messages ................343
Tilt Steering Column...........30, 31
Tips ......................322
Tire And Loading Information Placard . .261
Tire Markings.................257
Tires............137, 265, 270, 275
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..........268
Air Pressure ...............265
Chains ...............273, 274
Changing ..............217, 257
Compact Spare .............271
Flat Changing ..............217
General Information .......265, 270
High Speed ................266
Inflation Pressure ............266
Jacking ..................257
Life Of Tires ...............268
Load Capacity ...........261, 262
369
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ................74, 97
Quality Grading .............275
Radial ...................267
Replacement ...........217, 268
Rotation ..................274
Safety ...............257, 265
Sizes ...................258
Snow Tires ................270
Spare Tires ............270, 272
Spinning .................267
Tread Wear Indicators .........268
Wheel Mounting .............217
Wheel Nut Torque ............281
Tire Safety Information ...........257
Tow Hooks, Emergency...........226
Towing .................189, 224
Disabled Vehicle ............224
Guide ............189, 190, 191
Recreational ...............195
Weight ............189, 190, 191
Towing Behind A Motorhome .......195
Traction Control ................85
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)..........89
Trailer Towing ................189
Trailer Towing Guide .....189, 190, 191
Trailer Weight .........189, 190, 191
Transfer Case
Fluid ....................291
Transmission .................151
Automatic .............151, 256
Fluid ....................291
Maintenance ...............256
Shifting ..................148
Transporting Pets ..............135
Tread Wear Indicators ...........268
T
urn
Signals...............77, 205
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch
Display...................306
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display .....300
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call ..........336
Receiving A Call .............336
Uconnect Phone...............336
Uconnect Voice Command.........344
Uniform Tire Quality Grades........275
Unleaded Gasoline .............282
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....106
USB Port ...................324
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . .280
Vehicle Loading ...............262
Vehicle Storage ................47
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ..............13
Ventilated....................25
Voice Command ...............342
Commands ................341
Voice Recognition System
(VR) ..............341, 342, 344
Warning Flasher, Hazard ..........202
Warning Lights (Instrument
Cluster Descriptions) ...........72
Warnings, Roll Over ..............2
Warranty Information ............360
Washers, Windshield .........37, 247
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........272
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........272
Wind Buffeting ..............49, 50
Window Fogging ................47
Windows
Close ....................48
Down ....................48
Open ....................48
Power ....................48
Up......................48
Windshield Defroster ............136
Windshield Washers ..........37, 247
Fluid ....................247
INDEX
370
372
373
374
375
376
Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
Important
Get warranty and other information online – you can
review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of
the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous
and should never be done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular
telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
source for common questions. However, it is not a
substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please
consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover
and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply
to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
2018 GRAND CHEROKEE USER GUIDE
Includes SRT®
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage,
knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the
app an important extension of your Jeep
®
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model
and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP”
(U.S. residents only).
www.jeep.com⁄en ⁄owners (U.S.) provides special oers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle
by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the
“Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow
the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
18WK-926-AA
GRAND CHEROKEE
Seventh Edition
User Guide
